<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<rss version="2.0"
	xmlns:content="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/content/"
	xmlns:wfw="http://wellformedweb.org/CommentAPI/"
	xmlns:dc="http://purl.org/dc/elements/1.1/"
	xmlns:atom="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom"
	xmlns:sy="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/syndication/"
	xmlns:slash="http://purl.org/rss/1.0/modules/slash/"
	xmlns:itunes="http://www.itunes.com/dtds/podcast-1.0.dtd"
	xmlns:media="http://search.yahoo.com/mrss/"
>

<channel>
	<title>David Campbell -- Photography, Multimedia, Politics</title>
	<atom:link href="http://www.david-campbell.org/feed/rss/" rel="self" type="application/rss+xml" />
	<link>http://www.david-campbell.org</link>
	<description></description>
	<lastBuildDate>Tue, 16 Mar 2010 14:43:17 +0000</lastBuildDate>
	<generator>http://wordpress.org/?v=2.9.2</generator>
	<language>en</language>
	<sy:updatePeriod>hourly</sy:updatePeriod>
	<sy:updateFrequency>1</sy:updateFrequency>
	<cloud domain='www.david-campbell.org' port='80' path='/?rsscloud=notify' registerProcedure='' protocol='http-post' />
	<!-- podcast_generator="podPress/8.8" - maintenance_release="8.8.4" -->
		<copyright>2006-2007 </copyright>
		<managingEditor>david@david-campbell.org (David Campbell -- Photography, Multimedia, Politics)</managingEditor>
		<webMaster>david@david-campbell.org (David Campbell -- Photography, Multimedia, Politics)</webMaster>
		<category>posts</category>
		<itunes:keywords></itunes:keywords>
		<itunes:subtitle></itunes:subtitle>
		<itunes:summary>Photography, Multimedia, Politics</itunes:summary>
		<itunes:author>David Campbell -- Photography, Multimedia, Politics</itunes:author>
		<itunes:category text="Society &amp; Culture"/>
		<itunes:owner>
			<itunes:name>David Campbell -- Photography, Multimedia, Politics</itunes:name>
			<itunes:email>david@david-campbell.org</itunes:email>
		</itunes:owner>
		<itunes:block>No</itunes:block>
		<itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
		<itunes:image href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/plugins/podpress/images/powered_by_podpress_large.jpg" />
		<image>
			<url>http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/plugins/podpress/images/powered_by_podpress.jpg</url>
			<title>David Campbell -- Photography, Multimedia, Politics</title>
			<link>http://www.david-campbell.org</link>
			<width>144</width>
			<height>144</height>
		</image>
		<item>
		<title>Visualising &#8216;Africa&#8217; &#8211; moving beyond &#8216;positive versus negative&#8217; photographs</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/16/visualising-africa/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/16/visualising-africa/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 16 Mar 2010 10:25:29 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Africa]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Finbarr O'Reilly]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Guy Tillim]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[James Akena]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Joan Bardeletti]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Senegal]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Uganda]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=1067</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[A disaster. A lone child. Barefoot. In a barren landscape. The apparent absence of social structures.
This photograph recycles all the main elements in the dominant representation of ‘Africa’. As James Ferguson writes in his important book Global Shadows, “for all that has changed, ‘Africa’ continues to be described through a series of lacks and absences, [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>A disaster. A lone child. Barefoot. In a barren landscape. The apparent absence of social structures.</p>
<p>This photograph recycles all the main elements in the dominant representation of ‘Africa’. As James Ferguson writes in his important book <a href="http://books.google.com/books?id=qJUUA_MwMA4C&amp;lpg=PP1&amp;dq=James%20Ferguson%20Globa%20Shadows&amp;pg=PP1#v=onepage&amp;q=&amp;f=false" target="_blank"><em>Global Shadows</em></a>, “for all that has changed, ‘Africa’ continues to be described through a series of lacks and absences, failings and problems, plagues and catastrophes.&#8221;</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/Picture-3.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-1068" title="Picture 3" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/Picture-3.png" alt="Picture 3 Visualising Africa   moving beyond positive versus negative photographs" width="729" height="419" /></a></p>
<p><em>Caption: Bududa, Eastern Uganda. A boy walks over the churned mud after heavy rains caused landslides on Mount Elgon on Tuesday. Three villages were engulfed, at least 80 people were killed and around 250 are missing. </em><em>The Guardian, 6 March 2010, p. 23. Credit: James Akena/Reuters</em></p>
<p>The recent mudslides in Uganda that James Akena’s photo for Reuters symbolises are certainly worthy of reporting. The question is: regardless of the intentions of <a href="http://www.lightstalkers.org/james-akena  " target="_blank">the individual photographer </a>– a Ugandan who is an accomplished stringer – why did he choose this particular composition? And, equally important, given that he will have taken a number of images on site, how did this particular photo come to be selected by <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/news/gallery/2010/mar/03/1?picture=359983960" target="_blank"><em>The Guardian</em></a> to represent the story?</p>
<p>The choices that Akena made in taking the photograph, and <em>The Guardian</em> made in making it the largest picture in its ‘Eyewitnessed’ double page spread for the first week in March, are evident when compared to other pictures from the same event. On <em>The New York Times Lens</em> blog <a href="http://lens.blogs.nytimes.com/2010/03/03/pictures-168/" target="_blank">Stephen Wandera’s photograph</a> for AP (see slide 2) shows a large crowd at the scene searching for survivors, while a <a href="http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=24bNcr5735w  " target="_blank">Ugandan TV report</a> also shows the community at large. These demonstrate that the photography of the lone boy is a specific choice with particular effects that tap into a long history of visual representation.</p>
<p>It is time for the photographic visualization of ‘Africa’ to offer something different. In this context, it is worth noting that only two days prior to the publication of the Bududa photograph, <em>The Guardian</em> ran a story in its business section headlined “<a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/business/2010/mar/03/africa-makes-povery-history" target="_blank">Africa begins to make poverty history.</a>” It opened with claim that:</p>
<blockquote><p>For decades, it has been seen as the world&#8217;s lost continent. Now, a new study says that the view of Africa as a basket case is wrong.</p>
<p>As the continent prepares to welcome thousands of international football fans for the World Cup in June, it seems the image of an economically vibrant region the hosts are keen to project is closer to the truth than tired stereotypes suggest.</p></blockquote>
<p>It’s an important &#8212; though <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/society/2010/mar/09/africa-aid-economic-development-bbc" target="_blank">contested</a> &#8212; account of recent economic trends should give pause to those who simply recycle the old stereotypes, and  some photographers are producing different perspectives that challenge  those stereotypes.</p>
<p>One significant project doing this is Joan Bardeletti’s “<a href="http://www.classesmoyennes-afrique.org/en/" target="_blank">Middle Classes in Africa</a>,” a twenty-month project in six countries documenting the rise of this group and their potential role in the development of the continent. Three of the stories – from Mozambique, Kenya and the Ivory Coast – are on-line now. One of the pictures from the Mozambique story won a <a href="http://www.worldpressphoto.org/index.php?option=com_photogallery&amp;task=view&amp;id=1757&amp;type=byname&amp;Itemid=258&amp;bandwidth=high" target="_blank">World Press Photo award</a> this year for the “Daily Life/singles” category.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/Picture-4.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-1070" title="Picture 4" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/Picture-4.png" alt="Picture 4 Visualising Africa   moving beyond positive versus negative photographs" width="613" height="486" /></a></p>
<p><em>Caption: Un dimanche après midi en famille sur la plage près de Maputo. Joan Bardeletti/Picturetank</em></p>
<p>Bardeletti’s photographs show people, places, institutions and cultural events that are modern, well-resourced and more than a little familiar to the European eye. They reveal a complexity to ‘African’ life that belies the stereotypes. However, we have to refrain from seeing Akena’s photograph as ‘negative/wrong/false’ while Bardeletti’s are ‘positive/right/true’. These are tired forms of critique that overlook the fact that all photographers make aesthetic choices in the construction of imagery. In terms of what ‘we’ outside of ‘Africa’ see, the overriding concern needs to be less the <em>presence</em> of particular pictures than the <em>absence</em> of all the alternative possibilities.</p>
<p>This chimes with <a href="http://verbal.co.za/2009/07/guy-tillim/" target="_blank">an interview Guy Tillim, the renowned South African photographer, gave to Daniel Cuthbert&#8217;s <em>Verbal </em>blog</a> in July last year. Tillim observed:</p>
<blockquote><p>The thing is, there are serious problems in Africa which  did require our attention. One has to be careful with the  positive/negative thing. Just because one takes images of dance halls in  Lagos, and people being happy, it might end up being as much as a  cliché as the suffering image.</p>
<p>Positives images are one that are self-aware or are  interesting, penetrating and original no matter what they look at.  Negatives images are ones that perpetuate the issue. Let’s face it,  Stereotypes are currency in this industry and actively traded by western  media.</p>
<p>The problem with images is that we are so visually driven, clichés  are bound to be strong. There is a lack of context. If we see a  crumbling wall, we think this is a metaphor for the human issue. It’s  not, it’s often just a crumbling wall. What is positive and negative  depends on your view.</p></blockquote>
<p>Tillim&#8217;s recasting of what positive/negative mean is very important. Instead of it being a simple contrast of picture content &#8212; graphic images of famine versus smiling villagers, for example &#8212; he sees it as embodying an understanding of the purpose and function of photographs: &#8220;positives images are one that are self-aware or are  interesting,  penetrating and original no matter what they look at.  Negatives images  are ones that perpetuate the issue [the cliché].&#8221;</p>
<p>This is the position from which we should judge Bardeletti&#8217;s photographs. It will be interesting to see how many media outlets use Bardeletti’s photographs and stories once the project is completed in the summer of this year. Of course, there are many economic problems still facing the continent – such as <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/environment/2010/mar/07/food-water-africa-land-grab" target="_blank">the “land grab” of agricultural resources revealed recently by John Vidal</a> – but a more comprehensive visual account of ‘Africa’ must include photographs like Joan Bardeletti’s.</p>
<p>The scale of the visual challenge was confirmed while revising this post this morning, because today&#8217;s double-page &#8216;Eyewitness&#8217; feature in <em>The Guardian</em> showcased an image of the environmental devastation produced by salt mining on the Senegalese coast.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/Picture-2.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-1072" title="Picture 2" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/Picture-2.png" alt="Picture 2 Visualising Africa   moving beyond positive versus negative photographs" width="609" height="393" /></a></p>
<p><em>Caption: An aerial view of workers around pools of mineral-coloured  waterholes dug on salt flats on the Senegalese coastline. Photograph:  Finbarr O&#8217;Reilly/ Reuters</em></p>
<p>I don’t know why it was chosen, but my guess is that its aesthetics –  the colour and form – were probably the main criteria. It certainly wasn&#8217;t the start of a story on the context signified by the picture. Whatever the  reason, it doesn’t alter the political effect – another image of lack  and absences in ‘Africa’, and another prompt for a more complex, self-aware, form of &#8216;positive&#8217; photography.<em></em></p>
<p><em>[This is a revised version of my 14 March 2010 post for <a href="http://www.adevelopingstory.org/2010/visualizing-%E2%80%98africa%E2%80%99-from-the-lone-child-to-the-middle-classes" target="_blank">A Developing Story</a>]</em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/16/visualising-africa/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>2</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>‘Living in the Shadows’ wins multimedia journalism award</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/05/living-in-the-shadows-wins-multimedia-journalism-award/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/05/living-in-the-shadows-wins-multimedia-journalism-award/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 05 Mar 2010 16:46:34 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[multimedia]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[China]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Sharron Lovell]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=1037</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[I hope you will excuse this tiny bit of trumpet blowing, but I was excited to hear this morning that “Living in the Shadows,” the multimedia story on China’s internal migrants I produced for Sharron Lovell, has won an award in the United States.
It was named as one of the winners in The Society of [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>I hope you will excuse this tiny bit of trumpet blowing, but I was excited to hear this morning that “<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/multimedia/living-in-the-shadows/" target="_blank">Living in the Shadows</a>,” the multimedia story on China’s internal migrants I produced for <a href="http://www.lightstalkers.org/sharronlovell" target="_blank">Sharron Lovell</a>, has won an award in the United States.</p>
<p>It was named as one of the winners in <a href="http://sabew.org/2010/03/sabew-announces-winners-in-15th-annual-competition/" target="_blank">The Society of American Business Editors and Writers 15<sup>th</sup> annual Best in Business Journalism competition</a>. ‘Living in the Shadows,’ which we licensed to <em><a href="http://www.globalpost.com/china-economy-migrant-workers?vidNum=0" target="_blank">The Global Post</a></em>, won for “Online excellence in projects for mid-sized web sites.”</p>
<p>Most credit goes to Sharron for her excellent photojournalism, in the truest sense of that word. Recognising the significance of internal labour migration in China, Sharron pursued a long-term project based around three families in Shanghai, shooting stills, recording audio and producing video. Thanks goes also to the multimedia team at <em>The Global Post</em> who structured our project into chapters.</p>
<p>I can’t say we ever thought of the project as business journalism, but we are very happy to be counted amongst those recognized for “the best business news reporting during 2009.”</p>
<p>Equally, we have been delighted to see the project deployed by <a href="http://www.cmc-china.org/" target="_blank">Compassion for Migrant Children</a>, who have used it to help raise awareness about migrant issues.</p>
<p>Most importantly, it demonstrates the power of multimedia – giving a voice to the subjects, providing context and developing a more detailed narrative – in the future of photojournalism.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/05/living-in-the-shadows-wins-multimedia-journalism-award/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>3</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographic manipulation &#8211; World Press Photo needs to be transparent in enforcing its rules</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/03/photographic-manipulation-world-press-photo-needs-to-be-transparent-in-enforcing-its-rules/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/03/photographic-manipulation-world-press-photo-needs-to-be-transparent-in-enforcing-its-rules/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 03 Mar 2010 14:47:01 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Stepan Rudik]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[World Press Photo]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=1032</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Back in December last year I posted a commentary on World Press Photo&#8217;s new rule on &#8216;manipulation&#8217; of submitted imagery. The main point concerned the ambiguity of what “currently accepted standards in the industry” meant as the governing criterion. I concluded that &#8220;for the WPP clause to be effective, the organization is going to have [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Back in December last year I <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/06/photographic-manipulation-%E2%80%93-the-new-world-press-photo-rule/" target="_blank">posted a commentary</a> on World Press Photo&#8217;s new rule on &#8216;manipulation&#8217; of submitted imagery. The main point concerned the ambiguity of what “currently accepted standards in the industry” meant as the governing criterion. I concluded that &#8220;for the WPP clause to be effective, the organization is going to have to be transparent about its operation and the jury’s deliberations should a problem arise.&#8221;</p>
<p>The rule has been tested in its first year. WPP has announced that a winner &#8212; Stepan Rudik, 3rd prize in Sports Features &#8212; has been <a href="http://www.worldpressphoto.org/index.php?option=com_photogallery&amp;task=view&amp;id=1741&amp;type=byname&amp;Itemid=258&amp;bandwidth=high" target="_blank">disqualified</a> for removing an element from his photograph. According to WPP, &#8220;the photographer ventured beyond the boundary of what is acceptable practice.&#8221; (You can read the full WPP statement <a href="http://www.worldpressphoto.org/index.php?option=com_content&amp;task=view&amp;id=1819&amp;Itemid=50&amp;bandwidth=high" target="_blank">here</a>; the British Journal of Photography report is <a href="http://www.bjp-online.com/public/showPage.html?page=873604" target="_blank">here</a>; and @photojournalism posted<a href="http://www.en.rian.ru/photolents/20100215/157888668_4.html " target="_blank"> this link</a> to Rudik&#8217;s photograph on Twitter).</p>
<p>Now is the time for WPP to be transparent about its decision. The statement from the organization is commendable in so far as it goes, declaring how it acted in accordance with its new rule and making the decision public. But where are the details on the image and the photographer&#8217;s transgression? How was the photograph altered, and how did this venture beyond the boundary of acceptable practice?</p>
<p>These questions need to be answered given that the judgement has been made in terms of supposedly accepted industry standards. Such standards won&#8217;t mean much unless they are obvious to all, and WPP needs to offer a more detailed account of this case.</p>
<p><strong>UPDATE: 4 MARCH 2010</strong></p>
<p>The New York Times <em>Lens</em> blog has more detail on the story<a href="http://lens.blogs.nytimes.com/2010/03/03/behind-35/?src=tptw" target="_blank"> here</a>. It has a response from Stepan Rudik, and provides an important link to a post on <a href="http://www.petapixel.com/2010/03/03/world-press-photo-disqualifies-winner/" target="_blank">PetaPixel</a> which shows the &#8216;before&#8217; and &#8216;after&#8217; images from Rudik that show what the WWP jury objected to. These warrant a close look.</p>
<p>And here is the interesting thing&#8230;it was acceptable for Rudik to crop and desaturate an image of a hand being bandaged, but not acceptable to remove a small intrusion from something in the background of the cropped/desaturated photograph. No doubt Rudik violated the WPP rules, and I am not defending his removal of what is said to be part of a foot on the edge of the hand. My question &#8212; as always in these cases &#8212; is why is extensive cropping and complete desaturation acceptable but other changes not?</p>
<p>This is why WPP needs to be more transparent about this case. Its great that blogs like PetaPixel have done the investigative work, but we need to hear from WPP itself on what makes some changes acceptable and others not. How do these standards come to be &#8220;currently accepted&#8221; in the industry? We&#8217;ve heard from the photographer via PetaPixel, now we need to here from WPP.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/03/03/photographic-manipulation-world-press-photo-needs-to-be-transparent-in-enforcing-its-rules/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Ed Kashi to speak in London, 8-16 March</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/02/24/ed-kashi-london/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/02/24/ed-kashi-london/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 24 Feb 2010 11:14:56 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Ed Kashi]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[media economy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Niger Delta]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[oil]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=1024</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Here is something not to be missed – in early March Ed Kashi will be in London for a busy schedule of talks about photojournalism, activism and his project on the Niger Delta .
Between Monday 8 March and Tuesday 16 March Ed will be speaking at a number of venues across town – all the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Here is something not to be missed – in early March <a id="aptureLink_l2AZ2vmP4h" href="http://images.google.com/images?q=tbn:z6-515AEcmKVHM:do1thing.files.wordpress.com/2008/11/ed-kashi.jpg">Ed Kashi</a> will be in London for a busy schedule of talks about photojournalism, activism and his project on the <a id="aptureLink_zvNHIrqlDY" href="http://maps.google.com/maps?om=0&amp;iwloc=addr&amp;f=q&amp;ll=6.2556893%2C6.7253164&amp;hl=en&amp;z=4&amp;ie=UTF8">Niger Delta</a> .</p>
<p>Between Monday 8 March and Tuesday 16 March Ed will be speaking at a number of venues across town – all <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/curse_screen.pdf">the details are on this flyer</a>. He will also be <a href="http://www.foto8.com/new/on-display/host-exhibitions/134-host-exhibitions/1115-ed-kashi-curse-of-the-black-gold" target="_blank">opening his exhibition at HOST Gallery</a> on Tuesday 9 March.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/Picture-2.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-1026" title="Picture 2" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/Picture-2.png" alt="Picture 2 Ed Kashi to speak in London, 8 16 March" width="331" height="445" /></a></p>
<p>‘<a href="http://www.curseoftheblackgoldbook.com/" target="_self">Curse of the Black Gold</a>’ is an important and powerful project that demonstrates the injustices associated with fifty years of oil exploitation in the Niger Delta.</p>
<p>However, it’s much more than a book or exhibition. Ed Kashi’s practice demonstrates how photojournalists can pursue their stories across multiple platforms, with different partners, to great effect.</p>
<p>Ed’s reasoned optimism about the future of photojournalism (which prompted me to write more about the new media economy <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/22/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-5/" target="_blank">here</a>) is a powerful antidote to those fixated on the problems of contemporary media. I’m looking forward to joining Ed in <a href="http://www.arts.ac.uk/newsevents/6356/the-third-way/" target="_blank">debate at the London College of Communication</a> on Wednesday 10 March. If you get the chance to engage with Ed during his London visit you won’t be disappointed.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/02/24/ed-kashi-london/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>How does the media persuade us to give to charities?</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/02/21/media-charity-compassion/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/02/21/media-charity-compassion/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 21 Feb 2010 17:56:26 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Africa]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[charity images]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[compassion]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Fergal Keane]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[media]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=1021</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[In “Please Give Generously” – an excellent documentary broadcast on BBC Radio 4 this weekend – Fergal Keane examined the relationship between charities and the media, in which charities want to raise their profile as well as money, the media needs stories, and both traffic in drama.
Britain is home to 166,000 charities that last year [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>In “Please Give Generously” – an excellent documentary broadcast on BBC Radio 4 this weekend – <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fergal_Keane" target="_blank">Fergal Keane</a> examined the relationship between charities and the media, in which charities want to raise their profile as well as money, the media needs stories, and both traffic in drama.</p>
<p>Britain is home to 166,000 charities that last year received £10 billion in donations. Those are statistics that challenge the belief that “compassion fatigue” is an incurable part of the modern condition (a claim I plan to examine in greater detail in the near future). To be sure, giving declined 11% last year, largely because of the recession. But the speed and scale of the public response to disasters like the Haiti earthquake (for which the <a href="http://www.dec.org.uk/" target="_blank">Disasters Emergency Committee’s consolidated UK appeal has raised £80 million</a> shows that compassion for what are understood to be immediate, natural disasters is as great as ever.</p>
<p>Keane’s documentary did not dwell on the particular problems of photographic appeals, but it was at its most interesting when it turns to Africa (around 25:15), a continent he describes as “fixed in the mind by charity appeals” that trade in the symbols of disaster and distress. Here the need to simplify and shock diminishes context, leading to compassion without understanding.</p>
<p>In his conclusion, Keane claims there is a new public mood with respect to charitable appeals. Comprising a heightened scepticism and weariness, he declares the template of misery out of date, and sees a more sophisticated approach moving us away from “the age of dependency.”</p>
<p>While a more sophisticated approach is surely needed, and something other than a template of misery long overdue, I am in turn sceptical about claims the public suffers from weariness. In many ways – as the success of recent appeals suggests – “the public” seems as happy as ever with charity as a response to the problems of development and disaster.</p>
<p>Rather than suffering compassion fatigue, there might even be an enjoyment of the “excess of compassion.” This is something, Keane argues, that deflects attention away from the important questions of who is responsible and how they are culpable.</p>
<p>This documentary is worth listening to, so click on the player below to hear a full recording. (If nothing else, enjoy this 56-minute programme for the patrician tone in the archival recordings of British charity appeals broadcast in the 1920s and 1930s!).</p>
<p></p>
<p>Here are the programme notes from the BBC:</p>
<p>&#8220;Fergal Keane examines the history of charity appeals and the relationship between charity organisations and the media.</p>
<p>Be it a malnourished child in Africa, a neglected dog or a day centre desperately in need of new equipment, it seems that there is no end to the number of people, animals or organisations that could benefit from a charitable donation. And if charities can harness the power of the media with a hard-hitting advert, a celebrity endorsement or an emergency appeal, then it is likely that their cause will reap far greater financial rewards.</p>
<p>Fergal charts the history of the relationship between charity and the media, and considers the way the message is conveyed, the impact of celebrity endorsement, the quality of charity programmes and the responsibility and risks to the media in encouraging us to make a donation.</p>
<p>The history of charity and the media goes back to the earliest days of broadcasting. The BBC&#8217;s first charity appeal was in 1923, when it broadcast an appeal on radio for the Winter Distress League, a charity representing homeless veterans of the First World War. The appeal raised 26 pounds. In 1927 the BBC set up the Appeal Advisory Committee, whose role, to this day, is to decide on the BBC&#8217;s choice of charity partners and to oversee campaigns including The Radio 4 Appeal, Comic Relief and Emergency Appeals such as the Haiti Earthquake Appeal, which was broadcast recently.</p>
<p>Commercial broadcasters have also played their part in raising money for charity. In 1988 ITV launched its own all-night charity appeal, in the guise of the ITV Telethon. The 27-hour TV extravaganza saw all of its regional broadcasters come together to raise money for disability charities across the UK and the programme was repeated again in 1990 and 1992. In 2009, Sky Sports ran an interactive red button campaign during the Champions League final so that viewers could donate to a David Beckham-endorsed campaign to raise awareness of malaria.</p>
<p>Programme contributors:</p>
<p>Diane Reid, BBC Charity Appeals Advisor<br />
Lucy Polson, UK Representative for the charity SOS Sahel<br />
Caroline Diehl, chief executive of the Media Trust<br />
Jenni Murray, broadcaster<br />
John Grounds, director of Child Protection Consultancy.</p>
<p>Broadcast on:</p>
<p>BBC Radio 4, 8:00pm Saturday 20th February 2010.&#8221;</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/02/21/media-charity-compassion/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		<enclosure url="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/audio/BBCR4_Please_Give_Generously_200210.mp3%20" length="27236574" type="application/unknown"/>
<itunes:duration>00:01:01</itunes:duration>
		<itunes:subtitle>In ldquo;Please Give Generouslyrdquo; ndash; an excellent documentary broadcast on BBC Radio 4 this weekend ndash; Fergal Keane examined the relationship between charities and the ...</itunes:subtitle>
		<itunes:summary>In ldquo;Please Give Generouslyrdquo; ndash; an excellent documentary broadcast on BBC Radio 4 this weekend ndash; Fergal Keane examined the relationship between charities and the media, in which charities want to raise their profile as well as money, the media needs stories, and both traffic in drama.

Britain is home to 166,000 charities that last year received pound;10 billion in donations. Those are statistics that challenge the belief that ldquo;compassion fatiguerdquo; is an incurable part of the modern condition (a claim I plan to examine in greater detail in the near future). To be sure, giving declined 11% last year, largely because of the recession. But the speed and scale of the public response to disasters like the Haiti earthquake (for which the Disasters Emergency Committeersquo;s consolidated UK appeal has raised pound;80 million shows that compassion for what are understood to be immediate, natural disasters is as great as ever.

Keanersquo;s documentary did not dwell on the particular problems of photographic appeals, but it was at its most interesting when it turns to Africa (around 25:15), a continent he describes as ldquo;fixed in the mind by charity appealsrdquo; that trade in the symbols of disaster and distress. Here the need to simplify and shock diminishes context, leading to compassion without understanding.

In his conclusion, Keane claims there is a new public mood with respect to charitable appeals. Comprising a heightened scepticism and weariness, he declares the template of misery out of date, and sees a more sophisticated approach moving us away from ldquo;the age of dependency.rdquo;

While a more sophisticated approach is surely needed, and something other than a template of misery long overdue, I am in turn sceptical about claims the public suffers from weariness. In many ways ndash; as the success of recent appeals suggests ndash; ldquo;the publicrdquo; seems as happy as ever with charity as a response to the problems of development and disaster.

Rather than suffering compassion fatigue, there might even be an enjoyment of the ldquo;excess of compassion.rdquo; This is something, Keane argues, that deflects attention away from the important questions of who is responsible and how they are culpable.

This documentary is worth listening to, so click on the player below to hear a full recording. (If nothing else, enjoy this 56-minute programme for the patrician tone in the archival recordings of British charity appeals broadcast in the 1920s and 1930s!).



Here are the programme notes from the BBC:

"Fergal Keane examines the history of charity appeals and the relationship between charity organisations and the media.

Be it a malnourished child in Africa, a neglected dog or a day centre desperately in need of new equipment, it seems that there is no end to the number of people, animals or organisations that could benefit from a charitable donation. And if charities can harness the power of the media with a hard-hitting advert, a celebrity endorsement or an emergency appeal, then it is likely that their cause will reap far greater financial rewards.

Fergal charts the history of the relationship between charity and the media, and considers the way the message is conveyed, the impact of celebrity endorsement, the quality of charity programmes and the responsibility and risks to the media in encouraging us to make a donation.

The history of charity and the media goes back to the earliest days of broadcasting. The BBC's first charity appeal was in 1923, when it broadcast an appeal on radio for the Winter Distress League, a charity representing homeless veterans of the First World War. The appeal raised 26 pounds. In 1927 the BBC set up the Appeal Advisory Committee, whose role, to this day, is to decide on the BBC's choice of charity partners and to oversee campaigns including The Radio 4 Appeal, Comic Relief and Emergency Appeals such as the Haiti Earthquake Appeal, wh...</itunes:summary>
		<itunes:keywords>photography</itunes:keywords>
		<itunes:author>david@david-campbell.org</itunes:author>
		<itunes:explicit>no</itunes:explicit>
		<itunes:block>Yes</itunes:block>
	</item>
		<item>
		<title>Tod Papageorge and the &#8216;truth&#8217; of photography</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/01/08/tod-papageorge-and-the-truth-of-photography/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/01/08/tod-papageorge-and-the-truth-of-photography/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 08 Jan 2010 15:13:07 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Diane Arbus]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gary Winogrand]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Henri Cartier-Bresson]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Mark Durden]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Susan Sontag]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Tod Papageorge]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=1005</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Tod Papergeorge is one of the most insightful photographers around. Interviewed by Mark Durden for foto8 last November (I&#8217;m catching up on some reading while snowed in), he offered some interesting views on photography, documentary and truth.

Photo: Tod Papergeorge, &#8216;Central Park, 1978&#8242;
Durden asked Papageorge if he thought his work was part of what John Szarkowski [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><a href="http://art.yale.edu/TodPapageorge" target="_blank">Tod Papergeorge</a> is one of the most insightful photographers around. <a href="http://www.foto8.com/new/online/blog/1036-tod-papageorge-interview" target="_blank">Interviewed by Mark Durden for foto8</a> last November (I&#8217;m catching up on some reading while snowed in), he offered some interesting views on photography, documentary and truth.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/01/Picture-1.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-1007" title="Picture 1" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2010/01/Picture-1.png" alt="Picture 1 Tod Papageorge and the truth of photography" width="536" height="352" /></a></p>
<p><a href="http://nymag.com/arts/articles/07/04/senior-moment/" target="_blank"><em>Photo: Tod Papergeorge, &#8216;Central Park, 1978&#8242;</em></a></p>
<p>Durden asked Papageorge if he thought his work was part of what John Szarkowski called the <em>New Documents:</em></p>
<blockquote><p><em>New Documents</em> was an effective title for that exhibition, but none of the photographers included in it—Garry Winogrand, Diane Arbus, and Lee Friedlander—nor any other photographers I knew at that time, would have used the word “documentary” to describe what they were doing in their work. If nothing else, Robert Frank’s <em>The Americans</em> had taken care of that by defining an aesthetic that depended on poetic transformation, rather than an (apparently) literal fealty to a series of facts.</p>
<p>As for me, my initial introduction to serious photography occurred in 1962, when I discovered a couple of early pictures of Cartier-Bresson’s while taking a college course in basic photography. They convinced me, literally on the spot, to be a photographer—and not because I had an itch to document this or that aspect of the world. I saw these pictures as poetry, Cartier-Bresson as a prodigious poet, and photography as a way to possibly do something roughly in the same camp.</p></blockquote>
<p>Later in the interview, Durden asked Papageorge to expand on his statement (made in Papageorge&#8217;s essay on Gary Winogrand) that while photography pictures the world it does not follow that it has a moral responsibility to it. Was this not contrary to writers like Susan Sontag and other critics, said Durden:</p>
<blockquote><p>It’s always been puzzling to me that capacious minds like Sontag’s, to say nothing of those of almost every art historian, look at a photograph and see not a picture, but the literal world held in their palm. With that, they’re revealing themselves to be no more sophisticated than the proverbial tribesman who believes that a photograph made of him steals a piece of his soul. There seems to be no cure for this universal form of innocence, or ignorance, but it is, to put it mildly, frustrating to spend years working as a photographer and writer about photography and realise that this misunderstanding is as prevalent today as it was the day I first saw those Cartier-Bresson photographs—and recognised them as picture-poems.</p>
<p>You mention Genet and writing, a good parallel. Let’s say that the young Sontag reads the front page of the <em>Times</em>, and then turns to <em>Our Lady of the Flowers</em>, both experiences generated by black marks on a page, yet utterly different in their intention and, presumably, effect. Is it so difficult for her not to see, then, that the photographs on that front page are similarly different from the Diane Arbus portraits she’s thinking of writing about?</p></blockquote>
<p>For Papageorge, failing to appreciate the differences between news photographs and those of Arbus, Cartier-Bresson, Winogrand and others was the product of a philosophical error:</p>
<blockquote><p>&#8230;Sontag (and legions of French critics and their progeny) was tarring photography with a tired brush, based on a much older relationship that obtained between pictures and moral lessons, and the unexamined belief that the pictures themselves were in some way at least related to the literal truth.</p>
<p>Of course, semiotics teaches us, if we needed the reminder, that a photograph represents a physical trace of the world, and therefore exists in an ontological space quite different from that of any of the non-filmic arts. I don’t buy that argument: ontologically, a photograph is a unique kind of picture, but a picture nonetheless, one that has radically transformed the piece of the world it describes, whether for artistic or journalistic or any other ends, but (obviously) has not transported it out of its picture-state into some nebulous truth-state.</p></blockquote>
<p>I don&#8217;t want to draw any big conclusions at this point, other than to say that we need to think carefully about how Papageorge&#8217;s statements impact on the desire for photographs as documents. If work understood as &#8216;documentary&#8217; is better appreciated as &#8216;poetic&#8217;, what are the implications of this for truth claims based on pictures?</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2010/01/08/tod-papageorge-and-the-truth-of-photography/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>2</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Revolutions in the media economy (5) – the pay wall folly for photographers</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/22/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-5/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/22/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-5/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 22 Dec 2009 11:10:38 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[media economy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[multimedia]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Ed Kashi]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Jonathan Worth]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[pay walls]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Rupert Murdoch]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=988</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[This has been a momentous year for media. In my previous four posts on the revolutions in the media economy, I have used the present uncertainty to take a fresh look at the past many now view nostalgically. This critical view demonstrated that newspapers have always been commercial enterprises rather than altruistic associations, they were [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>This has been a momentous year for media. In my previous four posts on the revolutions in the media economy, I have used the present uncertainty to take a fresh look at the past many now view nostalgically. This critical view demonstrated that newspapers have always been commercial enterprises rather than altruistic associations, they were in decline many years before the Internet restructured the conditions of publishing, and that the practice of investigative journalism is something we need to create as much as we need to protect. In this context, photographers who believe that their practice is defined by an editorial paymaster committed to documentary work are going to have a very hard time.</p>
<p>During a <a href="http://www.28stories.co.uk/" target="_blank">recent panel discussion in London on “the new ecology of photojournalism,”</a> <a href="http://www.edkashi.com/" target="_blank">Ed Kashi</a> remarked that despite all the gloom and doom we should realize that this is now a potential golden age for photojournalism. He didn’t underestimate the problems but he urged people to think about the prospects for new forms of visual journalism across multiple platforms to diverse communities.</p>
<p>I think Ed is spot on with his reasoned optimism, but to appreciate where this might lead us, we have to drive a stake through the heart of a prehistoric argument that has dominated the last few weeks of the year.</p>
<h3>‘Parasites, thieves, and promiscuous behaviour’</h3>
<p><a href="http://online.wsj.com/article/SB10001424052748704107104574570191223415268.html?mod=WSJ_hpp_sections_opinion" target="_blank">Rupert Murdoch</a> and his trusty lieutenants (<a href="http://paidcontent.org/article/419-world-newspaper-congress-dow-jones-ceo-beware-of-geeks-bearing-gifts/" target="_blank">Les Hinton</a> of Dow Jones, <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/nov/17/times-editor-james-harding-online-charging" target="_blank">James Harding</a> of <em>The Times</em> and <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/nov/01/wall-street-journal-robert-thomson-digital-content" target="_blank">Robert Thompson</a> of <em>The Wall Street Journal</em> have launched a vicious rhetorical war against the free circulation of content on the internet, singling out Google and others for making aggregation and distribution possible.</p>
<p>This is part of a News Corporation effort to garner allies for their strategy to charge for news content. Plans to put their papers behind pay walls have been much trailed by Murdoch executives. The time it is taking to implement these proposals, combined with their unwillingness to follow through on their threats to block their content from Google’s view, demonstrates the purpose of these manoeuvres is to try and reshape the public debate, get as many other legacy media companies as possible to join them in similar strategies, and wring some business concessions from the successful new media companies in the process.</p>
<p>Murdoch’s protestations – which have been effectively countered by <a href="http://online.wsj.com/article/SB10001424052748704107104574569570797550520.html" target="_blank">Eric Schmidt</a> – have given some comfort to those in the photographic world who hope that the sight of a pay wall going up might mean the return a benevolent editorial paymaster. It’s time to put that dream to bed once and for all and face up to the challenges and potentials of the new era.</p>
<h3>The problem with pay walls</h3>
<p>What Murdoch and others are missing is the new ecology of the web and how that has changed things for good, in both senses. For those who want critical journalism in all its forms, the debate on pay walls is at best anachronistic and at worst counter-productive. We can see this in three different ways:</p>
<h4><strong>(i) Little money:</strong></h4>
<p>Building on the points in <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/14/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-1/" target="_blank">my first post of this series</a>, we need to appreciate that even the most successful pay wall strategy will never fund investigative journalism. Pay walls are a form of subscription. But subscriptions have only ever generated about 20% of a newspaper company’s revenue. This means the most successful pay wall will never compensate for the collapse in advertising revenue.</p>
<p>Nonetheless, the idea that people paying for content is the holy grail of lost revenue is increasingly promoted by <a href="http://www.independent.co.uk/news/business/news/publishers-prepare-for-uturn-as-70-plan-to-charge-for-online-content-1796342.html" target="_blank">media organisations who are now more willing than ever to explore this option</a>. It has become an almost theological commitment that users <em>should</em> pay. But this overlooks one very significant historical point – <em>consumers have not previously paid for content</em>. As <a href="http://www.paulgraham.com/publishing.html" target="_blank">Paul Graham argued</a>, we have paid for the mode of distribution rather than the information being distributed:</p>
<blockquote><p>Almost every form of publishing has been organized as if the medium was what they were selling, and the content was irrelevant. Book publishers, for example, set prices based on the cost of producing and distributing books. They treat the words printed in the book the same way a textile manufacturer treats the patterns printed on its fabrics.</p></blockquote>
<p>This has been the case with newspapers too. Rupert Murdoch, now demanding customers stump up for his articles, had <a href="http://www.independent.co.uk/news/murdoch-guilty-in-times-price-war-1094999.html" target="_blank">no qualms about selling at a loss by reducing the price of <em>The Times</em> to 10 pence a copy</a> (or giving it away as a free item in <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/greenslade/2009/oct/13/abcs-newsinternational" target="_blank">bulks</a>) during the British newspaper price wars of the 1990s. Having never priced his products in terms of the cost of content, now is an odd time for him to start.</p>
<p>It is possible that for highly specialized content consumers will be willing to pay something for access (see the conclusion to <a href="http://www.pbs.org/mediashift/2009/09/the-great-debate-on-micropayments-and-paid-content-part-2261.html" target="_blank">this debate</a>). While <a href="http://newsosaur.blogspot.com/2009/11/polls-apart-on-charging-for-content.html" target="_blank">recent surveys offer contradictory data</a> on how much or how often people will pay, even the highest of these numbers offers no hope as a general solution to the economic crisis of distributing journalism (while the lowest <a href="http://paidcontent.org/article/419-pcukharris-poll-only-five-percent-of-uk-readers-would-pay-for-online-ne/" target="_blank">condemns it as a flawed strategy</a>). Corporate media debts are too vast to be eased by revenue from premium content, so we should not cling to the false hope that new money will fund the documentary stories that have long been under-resourced.</p>
<h4><strong>(ii) Who they block:</strong></h4>
<p>The second problem with the supposed pay wall solution emerges when we have a more nuanced understanding of web traffic to news sites. Companies like to make a big deal about the <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/nov/26/abces-guardian-mail-telegraph" target="_blank">number of “unique users”</a> visiting their URLs, and this summation of global clicks is an important indicator of reach.</p>
<p>But most visitors come quickly for something specific and leave equally as quickly. They aren’t reading “the paper” on-line, but searching for a specific piece of information, consuming it, and moving on. Indeed, although some surveys have reported higher numbers, <a href="http://www.editorandpublisher.com/eandp/news/article_display.jsp?vnu_content_id=1004054948" target="_blank">the average time spent on a US news site</a> in November 2009 ranged from just four minutes up to a high of 23 minutes.</p>
<p><!--EndFragment--></p>
<p>If a news organization wants to extract commercial value from its online users, it needs to find a way to first attract large numbers and keep a proportion of these visitors on site for longer so that over time they become loyal. This means the target audience for such an economic strategy is much smaller. To illustrate this, <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/sep/27/peter-preston-mail-online-telegraph" target="_blank">consider the following metrics</a> from the <em>Daily Mail </em>in the UK:</p>
<ul>
<li>28.7 million unique users/month globally</li>
<li>8.9 million unique users/month from the UK</li>
<li>Of the UK users 611,588 came to the web site every day</li>
<li>Half of those UK daily users (c. 300,000) stayed for 20 minutes</li>
</ul>
<p>So while the headline-grabbing number of 28 million unique users suggests a vast community of potential value around the <em>Daily Mail,</em> in fact their loyal on-line users number just 300,000, which is just 7% of their daily print readership.  (<em>The Times</em> editor <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/nov/17/times-editor-james-harding-online-charging " target="_blank">recently confirmed</a> a similar pattern on his site by contrasting 20 million uniques with the 500,000 who had developed a ‘genuine digital habit’.</p>
<p>If one were thinking about a pay wall to control access to content on a paper with these user numbers, where would it be built? Around all content so that each and every visitor had to pay to pass? Around content viewed a certain number of times so the daily visitors were forced to open their wallets? Or directed at those who stayed on site the longest?</p>
<p>Two recent posts by <a href="http://www.yelvington.com/content/thinking-about-paywall-read-first" target="_blank">Steve Yelvington</a> and <a href="http://kiesow.net/2009/12/04/where-does-the-paywall-go/" target="_blank">Damon Kiesow</a> brilliantly illustrated the counterproductive nature of this dilemma from their experience with local American papers.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/12/Kiesow_graph.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-990" title="Kiesow_graph" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/12/Kiesow_graph.jpg" alt="Kiesow graph Revolutions in the media economy (5) – the pay wall folly for photographers " width="577" height="288" /></a></p>
<p>As this graph from Kiesow’s <em>Nahsua Telegraph</em> in New Hampshire makes clear, if your advertising depends on reach, you don’t want to cut off the huge number of uniques on the left, some of whom might be transformed into loyal users if they have open access.  And the number of daily/loyal visitors on the right is too small to build a viable subscription model on.</p>
<p>All this shows a general pay wall for news content will slash the number of visitors and fail to generate even modest revenue for investigative journalism. This is not the counter-theological proposition that “all information should be free” (a view Jay Rosen recently <a href="http://jayrosen.tumblr.com/post/262162693/no-names-no-links-writers-give-themselves-a-pass-and" target="_blank">found to be often proclaimed but little referenced</a> by those in favour of pay walls. It is recognition of the harsh economic realities of the web’s ecology for news that too many traditional companies are failing to appreciate.</p>
<p>Some, though, are realizing that this disparity between the millions of casual users and the thousands of loyal readers points the way to a new strategy. A Fairfax executive in Australia <a href="http://www.bandt.com.au/news/71/0C066271.asp " target="_blank">recently remarked</a> that <em>transactions</em> rather than advertising or content were the best on-line revenue streams. Crucially, transactions require news organisations to build a community around their brand and product, and then take a percentage of the transactions (hotel bookings, financial advice etc.) those community members conduct through the associations, links and relationships provided. <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/greenslade/2009/oct/01/daily-mirror-digital-media" target="_blank">Building a community based on the smaller, loyal audience</a> is something a <em>Daily Mirror</em> executive outlined, while <a href="http://www.knightdigitalmediacenter.org/leadership_blog/comments/at_slate_small_is_the_new_big/" target="_blank"><em>Slate</em></a> has been shifting from the pursuit of a mass audience (7 million uniques) to a smaller, more engaged audience (target 500,000) because “one curious reader is worth 50 times the value of the drive-by reader.”</p>
<h4><strong>(iii) How they limit public good:</strong></h4>
<p>Proponents of pay walls say consumers must contribute to the cost of journalism because it is a public good. We should debate the assumption that journalism per se is automatically a public good given “the media’s” patchy record for accountability in recent times. But even if we rather rashly accept that the majority of the fourth estate is critical of conventional wisdom and questioning of those in power, pay wall advocates have this argument upside down.</p>
<p>The public good of journalism in the age of the Internet comes from the vastly expanded possibilities of circulation and distribution. Clay Shirkey has argued this recently (<a href="http://www.niemanlab.org/2009/09/clay-shirky-let-a-thousand-flowers-bloom-to-replace-newspapers-dont-build-a-paywall-around-a-public-good/" target="_blank">see video here</a>) by calling attention to how a 2002 <em>Boston Globe</em> investigation of child abuse by Catholic priests in the city travelled globally from its Massachusetts origins to the global community of Catholics, mobilising social groups along the way, and ending with the Church having to take action internationally (such as in the recent <a href="http://www.justice.ie/en/JELR/Pages/PB09000504" target="_blank">Irish government report</a> on abuses in the Dublin Archdiocese).</p>
<p>Shirkey’s argument is that it was the <em>forwarding</em> of the original article, rather than just its publication, which enabled people to mobilise and force authorities to act. Circulation was what gave the story value as a public good. So while Murdoch and others see public re-use as a crime against civilization, both Shirkey (and Jay Rosen in his interview with Shirkey <a href="http://primarysources.journalism.nyu.edu/index.php?video_id=453" target="_blank">here</a>, starting at 9:30) demonstrate that in the new ecology of the web this forwarding (or “super-distribution”) of information and its public re-use is the condition of possibility for the very democratic ethos and public virtue media proprietors say they are desperate to defend. If information gets forwarded to journalists to cross-check and challenge their stories it can make them better, and the journalists’ stories get forwarded to people who are the most relevant thereby enabling social action. For Shirkey, this is the public good of publishing on the web. Murdoch might regard it as ‘promiscuous’, but pay walls would prevent the expansive sharing that is at the base of this public good.</p>
<h3>Towards the new futures of photojournalism</h3>
<p>Here is my point for photographers – forget all the fuss around the Murdoch-inspired debate about paying for content that has dominated the last few weeks of this year. Perhaps News Corporation will make pay walls work for some of its titles, but they won’t be the economic saviour of any media company. Nobody should pin their career hopes on them enabling a rosy future that will replicate a lost and largely mythic past. A new subscription-funded editorial paymaster looking for photographers to assign is not going to emerge, and holding out for media conglomerates to deliver this will only stymie creative development.</p>
<p>However, Murdoch is not really trying to create a new revenue stream (let alone one for documentary work). He is trying to change the terms of the public debate on the web in order to “call time on free distribution.” But that is an even more impossible task, because free distribution is both the intrinsic architecture and great virtue of the web. <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tim_Berners-Lee" target="_blank">Tim Berners-Lee</a>, who is credited with inventing the web, was recently asked why he put the web into the public domain as a free facility rather than a private enterprise. “Because otherwise it would not have worked,” he said. (Just watch the first two minutes of <a href="http://webtechman.com/blog/2009/10/24/best-web-video-ever-html-5-mobile-web-social-networks-more-from-the-masters/" target="_blank">this video interview with Berners-Lee</a> to appreciate this core value).</p>
<p>The successful visual journalist in the new media economy is therefore going to be someone who embraces the logic of the web’s ecology, using the ease of publication, distribution and circulation to construct and connect with a community of interest around their projects and their practice. Like the media players beginning to understand that developing and engaging a loyal community is more valuable than chasing a mass audience (while being open so those passers-by can become associates), photographers need to do the same. If people now understand they are publishers as well as producers this puts them in a new and potentially powerful position.</p>
<p>It won’t be easy (but when was photojournalism or documentary photography easy?), but the successful visual journalist will be someone who uses social media (in combination with the more traditional tools of books, exhibitions and portfolios) to activate partnerships with other interested parties to fund their stories, host their stories, circulate their stories, and engage with their stories. The social value of this is obvious, and this social value will be the basis for drawing economic value so the work can continue.</p>
<p>A good number of people (like <a href="http://blog.livebooks.com/2009/09/ed-kashi-beyond-multimedia-to-create-change-storytellers-must-conquer-multiple-media-platforms/" target="_blank">Ed Kashi</a>) are working this way now. Jonathan Worth has been pursuing <a href="http://jonathan-worth.blogspot.com/2009/11/proposal.html " target="_blank">a fascinating project</a> based on his portraits of <a href="http://craphound.com/?p=2364" target="_blank">Cory Doctorow</a> (read an interview with him <a href="http://www.photopromagazine.com/index.php/pro-resource/53-ideas-a-inspiration/256-social-skills-using-the-web-more-effectively.html" target="_blank">here</a> discussing this), and <a href="http://www.pdnpulse.com/2009/10/how-news-works-today-vii-seminar-at-ppe.html" target="_blank">VII is promoting discussions</a> around these themes.  In the last couple of weeks we have seen <a href="http://www.fastmediamagazine.com/?p=2839" target="_blank">new digital magazine formats</a> unveiled, and if developed these will be exciting platforms for visual work. What all these moves have in common is an embrace of the virtues of digital technology in an open web. Google has been one of <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/technology/2009/dec/22/google-icons-of-the-decade" target="_blank">the icons of the last decade</a>, and while as a company it is far from perfect, its success marks the path for the future so long as we understand what is novel about the web.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/22/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-5/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographic manipulation – the new World Press Photo rule</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/06/photographic-manipulation-%e2%80%93-the-new-world-press-photo-rule/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/06/photographic-manipulation-%e2%80%93-the-new-world-press-photo-rule/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 06 Dec 2009 20:23:35 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Photoshop]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[World Press Photo]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=985</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[World Press Photo has included a new clause about the manipulation of imagery in their entry rules for 2010. This clause says:
The content of the image must not be altered. Only retouching which conforms to currently accepted standards in the industry is allowed. The jury is the ultimate arbiter of these standards and may at [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>World Press Photo has included a new clause about the manipulation of imagery in their entry rules for 2010. This clause says:</p>
<blockquote><p>The content of the image must not be altered. Only retouching which conforms to currently accepted standards in the industry is allowed. The jury is the ultimate arbiter of these standards and may at its discretion request the original, unretouched file as recorded by the camera or an untoned scan of the negative or slide.</p></blockquote>
<p>For WPP, this clause is clear:</p>
<blockquote><p>In essence, this means that the content of an image must not be tampered with. The new clause is flexible enough to allow the jury some room for interpretation, because enhancement may be defined differently, for example, for a portrait than for a hard news picture.</p></blockquote>
<p>This new clause is most likely a reaction to the controversy sparked by the exclusion of Klavs Bo Christensen’s Haiti photos from the Danish picture of the year competition – a controversy I discussed <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/17/photographic-truth-and-photoshop/" target="_blank">here</a> in April. (Note that some of the links in that post no longer find details of the Christensen debate – it seems that what was being openly discussed earlier in the year is now being closed down. A summary and two of the offending images can still be seen <a href="http://nppa.org/news_and_events/news/2009/04/denmark.html" target="_blank">here</a> however).</p>
<p>As Photo District News <a href="http://www.pdnpulse.com/2009/11/world-press-photo-adds-rule-about-photo-manipulation.html" target="_blank">observed</a>, this clause begs more questions than it answers. What are the “currently accepted standards in the industry”? The recurrent controversies suggest they don’t actually exist. And the flexibility accorded to the jury in permitting interpretation for different domains of photographic practice demonstrates that even if standards can be cited, they are far from universal or fixed.</p>
<p>Nonetheless, the WPP clause is significant because it shows that the grounds for judging the legitimacy of documentary photographs come, not from external or objective standards linked to notions of realism, but from accepted practice within the genre of photojournalism and its history. In this conventional wisdom black and white photographs have long been the gold standard, but isn&#8217;t desaturating a picture a form of tampering? And if that is permitted, what is not allowed?</p>
<p>The clause also demonstrates that WPP clings to the desire to regard either the negative or RAW file as the foundation of photographic truth, the point of origin against which everything else can be judged. Given the operation of photographic technology both past and present that seems to be a misplaced faith.</p>
<p>It will be interesting to see how all this plays out in next years competition. For the WPP clause to be effective, the organization is going to have to be transparent about its operation and the jury’s deliberations should a problem arise.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/06/photographic-manipulation-%e2%80%93-the-new-world-press-photo-rule/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>6</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>The future of academic publishing in the digital age</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/06/the-future-of-academic-publishing-in-the-digital-age/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/06/the-future-of-academic-publishing-in-the-digital-age/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 06 Dec 2009 17:56:47 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[education]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[media economy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[academic publishing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Kyle Grayson]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Martin Coward]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[university]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=978</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Over the past few months I have been part of an ad hoc working group with colleagues from Newcastle University that has been exploring the future of academic publishing. Two problematics framed our analysis: how are changes initiated by the digital economy affecting academic journals and how might the editorial team of a top flight [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Over the past few months I have been part of an ad hoc working group with colleagues from Newcastle University that has been exploring the future of academic publishing. Two problematics framed our analysis: how are changes initiated by the digital economy affecting academic journals and how might the editorial team of a top flight journal in the social sciences respond to these challenges? As previously posted &#8211;<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/10/01/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-4/" target="_blank"> here</a> and <a href="http://www.chasingdragons.org/2009/08/5-trends-that-indicate-scholarly-publishing-models-are-no-longer-sustainable.html" target="_blank">here </a>&#8211; our initial conclusions have been that current models of academic journal publishing that rely on limiting access to research are no longer sustainable.</p>
<p>Kyle Grayson has written <a href="http://www.chasingdragons.org/2009/12/the-future-of-academic-journals-in-a-digital-age.html" target="_blank">a detailed and masterful post</a> that summarises our research and details its conclusions. Along with <a href="http://www.martincoward.net/2009/12/the-future-of-academic-journals-in-a-digital-age/" target="_blank">Martin Coward</a>, we are using our blogs to make the arguments available so that people can consider them in full, and Kyle&#8217;s post warrants sustained attention. A précis of our work underscores the points I made in my series on &#8216;revolutions in the media economy&#8217; &#8212; we concluded that current modes of publishing and distributing academic research are hampered in their desire for impact by pay walls, an insufficient web presence, and a reluctance to embrace social media. We recommend open access publishing aided and abetted by social media technologies as a way of ensuring the widest distribution and greatest potential impact of the good work done in the academy.</p>
<p>The fundamental challenge is this: are those university managers in a position to effect change open to the transformations that flow from the trends we identified? We don&#8217;t have all the answers, but the questions are now unavoidable.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/12/06/the-future-of-academic-publishing-in-the-digital-age/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>The fundamentalist defence of Chomsky on Bosnia</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/27/the-fundamentalist-defence-of-chomsky-on-bosnia/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/27/the-fundamentalist-defence-of-chomsky-on-bosnia/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 27 Nov 2009 18:33:09 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[Posts]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Bosnian War]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Camps]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Fikret Alic]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ITN]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Living Marxism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Noam Chomsky]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Trnopolje]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=964</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Being prepared to debate issues with fundamentalists is hard. And the revisionists who seek to change our understanding of the war in Bosnia by focusing on the pictures of the camps in the Prijedor region are certainly fundamentalists. They have their story and they are sticking to it no matter what; their commitment to evidence [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Being prepared to debate issues with fundamentalists is hard. And the revisionists who seek to change our understanding of the war in Bosnia by focusing on the pictures of the camps in the Prijedor region are certainly fundamentalists. They have their story and they are sticking to it no matter what; their commitment to evidence and reason is, at best, very weak.</p>
<p>I’ve been reminded of this in the wake of three comments submitted to my web site during the last week responding to my post on Chomsky and the issue of how the Bosnian Serb concentration camps at Omarska and Trnopolje were reported in 1992. Exercising my freedom of expression, I moderate all comments to my site, and declined to accept these three. They added nothing to the debate on the substance of the issue. They were long on personal abuse and short on analysis, and one of them was sent via an organisation promoting Holocaust revisionism.</p>
<p>I’ll be more than happy to post the comments of a critic who wants to engage the details of the 1992 ITN reports with grounded arguments; for example, someone who has a reasoned response to my detailed 2002 study of the issue. But claiming “the ITN photograph was a contrived piece of crap” doesn’t really cut it, and betrays a studied ignorance of Penny Marshall’s and Ian William’s two lengthy reports.</p>
<p>The only substantive point two of these correspondents raised was my use of the 2005 Emma Brockes’ <em>Guardian</em> interview of Chomsky as one of the four sources for his comments on the ITN vs. LM case. Here is what I wrote:</p>
<blockquote><p>In 2005, in his contested interview with <em>The Guardian</em>, Chomsky stated that “LM was probably correct” in its claims about the pictures and the camp, and that although “Ed Vulliamy is a very good journalist…he happened to be caught up in a story which is probably not true.” This is the first interview I cited in the email above, and <a href="http://www.chomsky.info/onchomsky/20051031.htm" target="_blank">the text comes from Chomsky’s own web site</a>. Chomsky objected strenuously to this interview and <em>The Guardian</em> (wrongly in many people’s eyes) issued him an apology. However, his main objection related to his views on Srebrenica, and his list of objections is available <a href="http://www.chomsky.info/letters/20051113.htm" target="_blank">here</a>. Chomsky never cited the statement about <em>LM</em> or Vuillamy as being wrongly reported, so he has not previously viewed it as “the complete fabrication” he now calls it. Presumably he doesn’t want to retract his statement in the interview about freedom of speech, that “…in the case of Living Marxism, for a big corporation to put a small newspaper out of business because they think something they reported was false, is outrageous.”</p></blockquote>
<p>I linked to the interview on Chomsky’s own web site (because The Guardian withdrew it), linked to his detailed objections about this interview also on his web site, and noted The Guardian’s apology. Neither Chomsky’s objections nor The Guardian’s apology touched on the quotes in the interview relating to the ITN vs LM case I drew attention to. However, despite that, and despite providing the context and the links to Chomsky’s site, this was regarded as lacking accuracy and honesty on my part. The problem arose, it was claimed, because I didn’t provide the links to the judgment’s of The Guardian’s readers editor and ombudsman in the ruling on Chomsky’s complaint that led to The Guardian’s apology. So let’s look at those links closely (<a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2005/nov/17/pressandpublishing.corrections" target="_blank">here</a> and <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/news/2006/may/25/leadersandreply.mainsection" target="_blank">here</a>), and see if they make a difference to the point I was making.</p>
<p>The reader’s editor found in favour of Chomsky on three points in the interview – two relating to his view of Srebrenica, and one to the positioning of a letter from an Omarska camp survivor with Chomsky’s letter to the editor after the interview. In other words, none of the findings related to Chomsky’s remarks on the ITN vs LM case, because Chomsky raised no objection to the reporting of his remarks on the case. Secondly, the external ombudsman reviewed the process that led to the findings of the reader’s editor after a counter-complaint from a group who felt The Guardian should not have apologised at all to Chomsky. In his findings, which supported the reader’s editor, John Willis wrote:</p>
<blockquote><p>the Terms of Reference from the Scott Trust to me made it clear that my task was to judge the adequacy and fairness of how the complaint was handled not the complex underlying historical debate which surrounds the Bosnian conflict.</p></blockquote>
<p>Therefore, the respondent who felt the Willis review was an additional source of support for Chomsky clearly didn’t understand the role of the external ombudsman. Nonetheless, Willis makes a point at the end of his review that the revisionists never point to. In the wake of the controversy following the publication of the Brockes’ interview, The Guardian published <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2005/nov/23/warcrimes.comment" target="_blank">a comment piece by the revisionist author</a> Diana Johnstone, whose views about the conflict in the former Yugoslavia Chomsky was supporting. Willis concluded:</p>
<blockquote><p>I am not convinced that the Guardian should have run the short comment piece by Diana Johnstone in the form it did. She was not the direct subject of the original interview and although comment and response pieces are part of Guardian culture, taken with the apology and correction letters and the Open Door article, this piece contributed to the impression that the newspaper may have over compensated for the original, albeit serious errors.</p>
<p>Ms Johnstone&#8217;s first paragraph referred to &#8220;some of the errors&#8221; being corrected which implied that there were more mistakes in the original interview than the substantial and clear apology from the Readers&#8217; Editor had detailed and to that extent was not completely fair to Emma Brockes.</p></blockquote>
<p>All this demonstrates my original summary of the Brockes’ interview, in relation to the issue I am concerned with – what Chomsky has said about the ITN vs LM case – was fair, accurate and more than reasonable. These further links simply confirm that, and in fact point to inconvenient details the revisionists never raise in their supposedly ceaseless pursuit of the truth. And remember – none of the people so keen to question the legitimacy of the Brockes&#8217; interview have anything to say about the video I posted of Chomsky’s interview with Serbian TV where he repeats and expands on his unsupportable thoughts about the Trnopolje images.</p>
<p>Interestingly, the links to the findings of the reader’s editor and external ombudsman make clear that the widespread support for Chomsky in 2005 was whipped up by an organization called Media Lens. They have been busy recently too, with Edward Herman and David Peterson publishing a lengthy “critique” of Ed Vuillamy’s letter to Amnesty International <a href="http://www.medialens.org/forum/viewtopic.php?t=3037" target="_blank">in their own open letter</a> to the organization, which has been republished on <a href="http://counterpunch.org/herman11232009.html" target="_blank">Counterpunch</a> and <a href="http://monthlyreview.org/mrzine/hp221109.html" target="_blank">Monthly Review</a>. This piece covers a wide range of issues, and <a href="http://bit.ly/8HoKg3" target="_blank">others have responded to it in some detail</a>.</p>
<p>With regard to the ITN vs LM case, Herman and Petersen have much to say, though we have heard it all before because they simply recycle the discredited Thomas Deichmann and Philip Knightly allegations (just as Chomsky does). <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/photography/atrocity-and-memory/" target="_blank">My original 2002 investigation picked those apart</a>, so trying to debate the likes of Herman and Petersen is largely pointless because of the way they rely on their false and partisan sources and studiously avoid counter arguments. Indeed, by going back to the flawed Deichmann and Knightly allegations of 1997, Herman and Peterson are oblivious to the fact that Deichmann, and then LM editor Mick Hume, substantially revised and retracted their original claims about the ITN reports and the nature of the camps under cross-examination during the 2000 High Court trial. What that shows is they have never read the hundreds of pages of court transcripts from that trial to see how the revisionist arguments were challenged and changed. In contrast, I have reviewed all that material and it provides an important source for my 2002 study.</p>
<p>However, one point, by way of demonstrating the erroneous nature of Herman and Peterson’s claims, is worth highlighting. They feel they have a decisive point supporting the charge that the ITN reports were fabricated when they turn to the Serbian documentary <em>Judgment</em> for support. They write (in note 17 of their piece):</p>
<blockquote><p>We strongly recommend this documentary. In Part Two, from roughly the 4:44 minute-mark on, the physical location of the British reporters and cameraman is unmistakable: They set-themselves-up inside the area enclosed by the chicken-wire and barbed-wire fence which, shortly thereafter, they would incorporate into their Fikret Alic images.</p></blockquote>
<p>In my 2002 articles (part 1, p. 30, note 65) I dealt with this claim:</p>
<blockquote><p>The RTS video <em>Judgement </em>maintains it has the clinching evidence: ‘Our crew filmed the ITN people as they manoeuvred into this area [the alleged enclosure] through a hole in the broken-down fence, then we followed’. The curious thing is that <em>Judgment </em>does not contain this supposedly crucial footage. If they filmed this manoeuvre, as they say, where are the pictures? Their absence testifies to the falsity of the claim.</p></blockquote>
<p>I recommend, therefore, <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/photography/atrocity-and-memory/videos/">after viewing the complete Marshall and William’s video reports on my site</a>, people follow Herman and Peterson’s invitation to watch this section of <em>Judgment</em> on YouTube, so <a href="http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_eOjxauzsn8" target="_blank">here is the link</a>. What is there is not what they claim. Indeed, there is nothing there – at the moment the narrator says the Serbian crew filmed the ITN crew stepping inside a supposed enclosure, we don’t see anything of the ITN crew ‘manoeuvring’ through a hole as alleged. Instead, there are various scenes in and around Trnopolje, similar to some in the ITN reports themselves. By the time we see an image of Marshall and her crew they are standing next to the fence that encloses the prisoners, filming a segment that would end up consuming only twenty seconds of Marshall’s seven minute report and even less of William’s.</p>
<p>This sums up the fundamentalist attitude of the revisionists – they see what they want to see, not what is actually there in the video. There are many other claims in the Herman and Petersen polemic that could be equally contested, and I have done so in my 2002 articles. But there are perhaps few claims more grotesque than their observation that,</p>
<blockquote><p>…it is well established that Fikret Alic&#8217;s physical appearance—often described as &#8220;xylophonic&#8221; because his ribcage showed prominently through his extremely thin torso—was not representative of the rest of the displaced persons seen at Trnopolje by the British reporters on August 5, 1992.</p></blockquote>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/photography/atrocity-and-memory/videos/" target="_blank">Just watch the two ITN reports in their entirety</a>. And look at <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/09/karadzic-photography-revisionism/" target="_blank">the Ron Haviv photo</a> in my earlier post. There were dozens, perhaps a majority, of men at Trnopolje whose physical condition exhibited signs of maltreatment like Fikret Alic. He was not exceptional. That is well established. What is exceptional is the revisionists’ unwillingness to see beyond their fundamentalism.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/27/the-fundamentalist-defence-of-chomsky-on-bosnia/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>7</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Chomsky’s Bosnian shame</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/14/chomskys-bosnian-shame/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/14/chomskys-bosnian-shame/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sat, 14 Nov 2009 18:08:53 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Amnesty International]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Bosnian War]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Camps]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Fikret Alic]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ITN]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Living Marxism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Noam Chomsky]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Trnopolje]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=935</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Following on from the controversy surrounding Noam Chomsky’s October 2009 Amnesty International lecture in Belfast (see here), I have been receiving new information on interviews Professor Noam Chomsky has given in recent years where he discusses, amongst other issues, the 1992 ITN television reports of the Bosnian Serb camps at Omarska and Trnopolje.
My correspondence with [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Following on from the controversy surrounding Noam Chomsky’s October 2009 Amnesty International lecture in Belfast (see <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/09/karadzic-photography-revisionism/" target="_blank">here</a>), I have been receiving new information on interviews Professor Noam Chomsky has given in recent years where he discusses, amongst other issues, the 1992 ITN television reports of the Bosnian Serb camps at Omarska and Trnopolje.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">My correspondence with Noam Chomsky:</span></p>
<p>I’ll say some more about these interviews below, but one thing I have always wondered was whether Chomsky was open to evidence that these TV reports were in fact an accurate portrayal of the Prijedor region camps. So, having written the most detailed study available on this issue – <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/photography/atrocity-and-memory/" target="_blank"><em>Atrocity, Memory, Photography</em>, a two-part academic article</a> – last week I decided to write to Professor Chomsky and ask if he had, or was willing to read, my two articles, and if so, what he thought about them. He did reply, and the reply is revealing.</p>
<p>Here is the verbatim exchange:</p>
<blockquote><p><strong>To:</strong> Noam Chomsky &lt;<span style="text-decoration: underline;">mailto:chomsky2@mit.edu</span>&gt;<br />
<strong>Sent:</strong> Thursday, November 12, 2009 1:30  PM<br />
<strong>Subject:</strong> Bosnian camp photos &#8211; the true story of ITN vs LM</p>
<p>Dear Professor Chomsky</p>
<p>In 2002 I published two lengthy, refereed academic articles in  the Journal of Human Rights on the controversy surrounding the ITN news reports from the Bosnian Serb camps in 1992. These articles (attached as PDFs) were the result of two years research using many primary sources, and they have been freely available on the web for the last few years.</p>
<p>I am aware that you have made a number of statements repeating and endorsing the substance of the Thomas Deichmann/Living Marxism critique of the ITN reports.  I am referring to two items available on your web site, namely the 2005 interview with The Guardian (http://www.chomsky.info/onchomsky/20051031.htm) and the 2006 interview with RTS (http://www.chomsky.info/interviews/20060425.htm).</p>
<p>In light of my research, I find those statements very disturbing. I believe if you examined the empirical details of the case you would recognise that the Deichmann/LM position is without foundation when it comes to the accuracy of the original TV reports and the meaning of the camp at Trnopolje.</p>
<p>I hope you will read my work, and I look forward to your response.</p>
<p>Yours sincerely</p>
<p>David Campbell</p></blockquote>
<p>Within hours, Chomsky responded:</p>
<blockquote><p>On 12/11/2009 19:13, &#8220;Noam Chomsky&#8221; &lt;chomsky@MIT.EDU&gt; wrote:</p>
<p>Thanks for the reference.  I&#8217;ll look it up.  I doubt that I&#8217;ll have any comments, unless you raised the matter of freedom of speech.  On the camp and the photo, I&#8217;ve barely discussed it, a single phrase in an interview, in fact, which didn&#8217;t say much.  I realize that the Balkans are a Holy Issue in England, far more sensitive than Israel in the US, so perhaps it is not surprising that a single phrase in an obscure interview, which said virtually nothing, would arouse utter hysteria, as it has.</p>
<p>As for the sources you cite, one of them (the Guardian interview) was known at once to be a complete fabrication, so ridiculous that the Guardian ombudsman quickly issued an apology and it was withdrawn from their website (over my objection &#8212; I think the antics of the media should be exposed).  As for the other, I said almost nothing about the photo and the camp, apart from repeating Knightley&#8217;s conclusions about what was probably the case.   I presume you agree that he is a credible source, whether right or wrong.  I&#8217;ll be happy to send it to you if you haven&#8217;t seen it, along with his bitter condemnation of British intellectuals for their shameful contempt for freedom of speech.  In the interview to which you referred, that is what I discussed.  If you disagree with him, you should write to him, not me.</p>
<p>I am well aware that the concept of freedom of speech is not regarded highly in England, so even this shameful escapade passed with virtually no criticism, in fact with euphoria.  I&#8217;ll be interested in seeing how you handled it in your articles.  I don&#8217;t see anything at all disturbing in my comments, except that they were perhaps too mild in condemnation of British intellectual practices.  I do, however, think you might consider your own reaction, and ask whether the words &#8220;very disturbing&#8221; might be appropriate.</p>
<p>Noam Chomsky</p></blockquote>
<p>This wasn’t exactly an invitation to intellectual engagement (“I doubt that I&#8217;ll have any comments…”). And he doesn’t hesitate to conclude with an attack (that my concern about his statements is itself “very disturbing”). Given this, I didn’t bother with a direct reply. But a public reply is warranted given the seriousness of the issue, so I intend to examine in detail Chomsky’s response.</p>
<p>Let’s skip over the question of whether the Balkans are a “holy issue” in England; whether calling attention to his statements is evidence of “utter hysteria”; and his claim that freedom of speech is “not regarded highly in England” and that “British intellectual practices” are to be condemned <em>tout court. </em>I am neither English nor British, but the more important point is that Chomsky has said all these things many times before, and the repetition of these charges suggests he keeps a stock answer for enquiries such as mine. Engaging with the challenging views doesn&#8217;t seem to interest him. Of course, If Professor Chomsky decides to debate the substance of the two articles I sent him in a future reply, I will post his response and correct anything below should he demonstrate anything I&#8217;ve written is incorrect.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What Chomsky has said on the photographs of the Bosnian camps</span></p>
<p>Lets instead look at what Chomsky, in his own words, has actually said about the issue of ITN news reports, the photograph of Fikret Alic, and the Bosnian camps.</p>
<ul>
<li>From the outset Chomsky has viewed the issue as one of free speech above all else, and thus lent his support to <em>LM</em>’s case against ITN and its reporters. However, after the jury verdict found against <em>LM</em>, Chomsky was quoted in <em>The Guardian</em> (<a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2000/feb/21/pressandpublishing.mondaymediasection6" target="_blank"><em>Media supplement</em>, 21 February 2000, p. 9</a>) as saying that it was “evil” if <em>LM</em>’s reporting “dishonoured the suffering of those in the Bosnian war.” That was the high point of Chomsky’s concern for the human rights of those in the Bosnian camps.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>In the 2003 Swedish controversy surrounding Diana Johnstone’s revisionist book, as discussed in the previous post, Chomsky endorsed the statement that said this book was “an outstanding work, dissenting from the mainstream view but doing so by an appeal to fact and reason, in a great tradition.” Johnstone’s book quotes and endorses the <em>LM</em> critique of the Bosnian camp stories (see pages 72-73). Given that it was published after the High Court trial found the <em>LM</em> case to be totally without merit, Chomsky is indirectly claiming the reiteration of falsehoods counts as “an appeal to fact and reason.” He goes further in his letter to Swedish friends when he states the case of Living Marxism “is important” and that Johnstone “argues – and, in fact, clearly demonstrates – that a good deal of what has been charged has no basis in fact, and much of it is pure fabrication.”</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li> In 2005, in his contested interview with <em>The Guardian</em>, Chomsky stated that &#8220;LM was probably correct&#8221; in its claims about the pictures and the camp, and that although &#8220;Ed Vulliamy is a very good journalist…he happened to be caught up in a story which is probably not true.&#8221; This is the first interview I cited in the email above, and <a href="http://www.chomsky.info/onchomsky/20051031.htm" target="_blank">the text comes from Chomsky’s own web site</a>. Chomsky objected strenuously to this interview and <em>The Guardian</em> (wrongly in many people’s eyes) issued him an apology. However, his main objection related to his views on Srebrenica, and his list of objections is available <a href="http://www.chomsky.info/letters/20051113.htm" target="_blank">here</a>. Chomsky never cited the statement about <em>LM</em> or Vuillamy as being wrongly reported, so he has not previously viewed it as “the complete fabrication” he now calls it. Presumably he doesn’t want to retract his statement in the interview about freedom of speech, that “…in the case of Living Marxism, for a big corporation to put a small newspaper out of business because they think something they reported was false, is outrageous.&#8221; (I’ll return to the significance of that claim below).</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>The second interview I cited in the email to Chomsky was one <a href="http://www.chomsky.info/interviews/20060425.htm" target="_blank">he gave Danilo Mandic of Serbia’s RTS on 25 April 2006</a>. It covered a range of issues, but does include a significant exchange on the Trnopolje pictures. Despite saying in his email to me that “I said almost nothing about the photo and the camp…”, here is the relevant section:</li>
</ul>
<blockquote>
<p style="padding-left: 30px;">NC: …However, but if you look at the coverage, for example there was one famous incident which has completely reshaped the Western opinion and that was the photograph of the thin man [‘in the concentr…’] behind the barb-wire.</p>
<p style="padding-left: 30px;">DM: A fraudulent photograph, as it turned out.</p>
<p style="padding-left: 30px;">NC: You remember. The thin men behind the barb-wire so that was Auschwitz and &#8216;we can&#8217;t have Auschwitz again.&#8217; The intellectuals went crazy and the French were posturing on television and the usual antics. Well, you know, it was investigated and carefully investigated. In fact it was investigated by the leading Western specialist on the topic, Philip Knightly [sic], who is a highly respected media analyst and his specialty is photo journalism, probably the most famous Western and most respected Western analyst in this. He did a detailed analysis of it. And he determined that it was probably the reporters who were behind the barb-wire, and the place was ugly, but it was a refugee camp, I mean, people could leave if they wanted and, near the thin man was a fat man and so on, well and there was one tiny newspaper in England, probably three people, called LM which ran a critique of this, and the British (who haven&#8217;t a slightest concept of freedom of speech, that is a total fraud)…a major corporation, ITN, a big media corporation had publicized this, so the corporation sued the tiny newspaper for lible [sic]….”</p>
</blockquote>
<p>Perhaps that is ‘saying almost nothing’ to Chomsky, but it contains a number of untrue claims and is consistent with his earlier views. Indeed, in describing the pictures of Fikret Alic at Trnopolje as the ‘thin man behind barbed wire’ photographs, Chomsky is using Diana Johnstone’s phrasing to repeat Thomas Deichmann’s erroneous allegations. Most importantly, the RTS interview shows that he accepts the interviewer’s declaration that “the photograph of the thin man” – which Chomsky starts to say is in a “concentration camp”, but corrects himself to say just “behind the barb-wire” – is “fraudulent.” That is a major claim, and one that is demonstrably wrong.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Examining Chomsky’s source: the flaws in Philip Knightley’s argument</span></p>
<p>In his email reply to me, Chomsky maintained that his RTS interview simply repeated Phillip Knightley’s conclusions about the case. I accept that Knightley has written some credible things on war reporting generally, but in the case of the Bosnian camp photos his analysis, such as it is, is filled with errors and wrong in its conclusions. I have a copy of the Knightley analysis, so let’s examine the document that Chomsky continues to draw on for his understanding of this issue.</p>
<p>The main elements of Philip Knightley’s statement on the case can be found <a href="http://www.counterpunch.org/cockburn11052005.html" target="_blank">here</a>. I have a longer document written by Knightley (and circulated recently by Chomsky) that incorporates this but has some other details.</p>
<p>Those details make clear Knightley’s document dates from 1998-99, and consists of a statement Knightley gave to Helene Guldberg, who was then the publisher of <em>LM</em> and one of the three named defendants in the libel action brought by ITN. Although it is claimed that Knightley presented this statement to the High Court in London during the trial, the transcripts of the libel trial show Knightley did not testify, and there is no record of the role, if any, his statement played in proceedings. It seems, therefore, to have been a background briefing for the <em>LM</em> defendants as they prepared their defence.</p>
<p>The chronology of Knightley’s interest in this case is worth noting. He says he first came across the still image taken from the ITN reports when he was researching an article on female war correspondents for the Australian magazine <em>The Independent Monthly</em>. Knightley says this was in October 1994, but in fact the article appeared in the October 1993 issue (I have a paper copy). This reveals that, although he casts himself as the authority on war photography and reporting, he does not trace his memory of the Trnopolje pictures to their original broadcast and publication more than a year earlier.</p>
<p>Knightley then makes the interesting claim that on his first, albeit delayed, encounter with the photograph of Fikret Alic that “I was immediately struck by the fact that the image was too good to be true.” This judgment – or, more accurately, pre-judgment – then colours the remainder of his analysis.</p>
<p>Knightley says he examined the ITN report frame by frame, but given his summary conclusions and the lack of any detailed analysis in his statement we have to wonder how much attention he paid to the specifics of the report. Knightley writes:</p>
<blockquote><p>I have no way of knowing what the ITN team members said or decided when they were compiling their report after their visit to Trnopolje. But I know enough about television war reporting to be able to say that once they saw the image their camerman had captured of an emaciated Fikret Alic with the stand of barbed wire across his chest, that image then drove and dominated their report. Their words were chosen to fit the image whether the facts justified them or not.</p></blockquote>
<p>This conclusion is unsupported on two counts. The first is that the ITN reports (both Penny Marshall’s ITV story and Ian Williams’ Channel 4 story) concentrate at the outset by what the reporters found at Omarska rather than Trnopolje. Indeed, it is revealing that throughout this controversy <em>LM</em> and its defenders studiously ignored this fact and carefully avoided discussion of the larger camp at Omarska. Yet Omarska was the subject of the first half of both these television stories. The second half of each deals with Trnopolje, but the sequence of Fikret Alic at the barbed wire fence runs for 20 seconds in Marshall’s story and a mere five seconds in Williams’.</p>
<p>The claim that the image of Alic behind the fence “drove and dominated” these reports is, therefore, simply wrong. The best way to see that is to do something that Knightley did badly and I doubt Chomsky has done at all – actually view the reports in their entirety. Anyone can see them <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/photography/atrocity-and-memory/videos/" target="_blank">here</a>.</p>
<p>Of course, if Knightley wanted an insight into what the ITN team members said or decided when compiling their report he could have interviewed them, as he interviewed Thomas Deichmann to get the details of his charges against ITN. After the High Court trial he could also have revisited the issue, because in testimony that very discussion was probed (see my article, part 2, p. 148), revealing that the ITN team decided <em>against</em> using the term ‘concentration camp’ to frame their report, thereby ensuring that the Alic images played a minor role in their coverage.</p>
<p>There are two other elements in Knightley’s flawed analysis that are worth highlighting. The first is his claim that, although ITN was right to report that Alic and others were detained at Trnopolje, the camp “was not a concentration camp in the Second World War sense.” This is also part of Chomsky’s statement to RTS (that the Alic pictures lead everyone to assume the camp was like Auschwitz), is what drives much of Diana Johnstone’s views, and was absolutely central to the whole <em>LM</em> campaign against the ITN coverage. The issues here are complex (and are discussed in detail in my article, part 2, pp. 145-52).  Trnopolje is not like Auschwitz. But the important point is that the line of argument which says ‘Trnopolje cannot be a concentration camp because it is not the same as Auschwitz’ betrays an impoverished historical knowledge about the phenomenon both of concentration camps generally and the vast Nazi system of labour, concentration and death camps that made up the Final Solution.</p>
<p>The second and final feature of Knightley’s flawed analysis I want to draw attention to is his claim that the image of Alic behind the barbed wire “changed the course of the war” in Bosnia. It is a view Chomsky repeats in his RTS interview where he states that the Alic photo was “one famous incident which has completely reshaped the Western opinion.” Both these statements are unfounded. Knightley alleges that the Bush administration of 1992 changed its policy to Serbia within 20 minutes of the ITN story being shown on American television, and that an emergency British cabinet meeting immediately agreed to send 1,800 ground troops to Bosnia. Neither thing happened as claimed, as I make clear in my article, part 2, pp. 158-59.</p>
<p>It seems that Knightley has taken the view about US policy changing quickly from a <em>Sunday Times</em> report in 1992 which made just this statement, something that demonstrates the shallowness of Knightley’s analysis. In fact, what then President Bush said was, having seen the report, he was personally outraged and would press for a UN Security Council resolution to ensure humanitarian relief convoys reached needy civilians. At no stage was there ever a suggestion of US ground troops being dispatched to Bosnia to intervene in the war. Indeed, the only US ground forces that made it to the region did not arrive until 1996 when they were part of the international mission overseeing the Dayton piece agreement, which partitioned Bosnia and rewarded the Bosnian Serbs for their ethnic cleansing. Equally, no British forces were dispatched in the wake of the report, and the only ones that made it to Bosnia were UN ‘peacekeepers’ sent to supervise relief convoys. They weren’t given a war fighting mandate and had to stand on the sidelines watching ethnic cleansing operations being carried out. The idea that the picture of Fikret Alic paved the way for the rapid deployment of western military forces to fight is a fiction of the revisionists’ imagination – and a forlorn desire of those Bosniaks who at the time were desperate for such action.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What about free speech in this case?</span></p>
<p>What unites Chomsky and Knightley in their outrage at ITN is the view that this whole issue is about freedom of speech above all else. When ITN decided to take legal action against <em>LM</em> for its claims about their reporters and the August 1992 story, many British commentators (in a challenge to Chomsky’s anglophobia) were opposed to the idea that a major media corporation would sue a smaller (albeit well produced and generously funded) publication. I discussed these issues in my original study (part 2, pp. 160-66).</p>
<p>There are important issues relevant to freedom of speech in Britain’s peculiar laws of libel, and many people want to see these laws overhauled. Indeed, only this week Index on Censorship and English PEN have released a major report as part of the <a href="http://libelreform.org/index.php" target="_blank">Libel Reform Campaign</a> that details the needed changes. This demonstrates, contra Chomsky, that there are many significant British voices concerned about freedom of expression. I support this campaign for libel law reform and support the recommendations of IoC and English PEN.</p>
<p>However, in the case of the Bosnian camp photos we need to separate a number of different strands. Questions about the veracity of the ITN coverage and details of the conditions at Omarska and Trnopolje need to be considered <em>apart from</em> the issue of whether it was right that ITN was able to sue <em>LM</em>. This is where Chomsky, Knightley and others fail so spectacularly. It would have been quite possible for Chomsky to say <em>LM</em> should be able to publish what it wanted without any repercussions even though what they published in this case was both wrong and offensive. In his first comment on the case, Chomsky adopted a position something like this. However, since then he has folded his freedom of speech concern into a series of claims that support the substantive details of <em>LM</em>&#8217;s untrue allegations, while at the same time disingenuously claiming he is not taking a position on the merits of the case. As a result, Chomsky, Knightley and their supporters refuse to see the different dimensions here, prioritise an absolutist view of freedom of speech, and then make revisionist arguments designed to belittle the victims of ethnic cleansing in Bosnia in order to buttress their outrage at what one media company did to another. In so doing, they choose to regard ITN as simply a corporation, and overlook the way the individual reporters pursued the story despite military censorship by the Bosnian Serb authorities. Indeed, at no point in this controversy have Chomsky and others been concerned about the freedom of speech of those reporters.</p>
<p>I also think that, as strange as existing British libel law is, it had an important and surprisingly beneficial effect in the case of ITN vs LM. The <em>LM</em> defendants and Thomas Deichmann were properly represented at the trial and were able to lay out all the details of their claim that the ITN reporters had “deliberately misrepresented” the situation at Trnopolje. Having charged &#8216;deliberate misrepresentation&#8217;, they needed to prove &#8216;deliberate misrepresentation&#8217;. To this end, the <em>LM</em> defendants were able to cross-examine Penny Marshall and Ian Williams, as well as every member of the ITN crews who were at the camps, along with other witnesses. (That they didn’t take up the opportunity to cross-examine the Bosnian doctor imprisoned at Trnopolje, who featured in the ITN stories and was called to testify on the conditions he and others suffered, was perhaps the moment any remaining shred of credibility for <em>LM</em>’s allegations evaporated). They were able to show the ITN reports to the court, including the rushes from which the final TV stories were edited, and conduct a forensic examination of the visuals they alleged were deceitful. And all of this took place in front of a jury of twelve citizens who they needed to convince about the truthfulness of their allegations.</p>
<p>They failed. The jury found unanimously against <em>LM</em> and awarded the maximum possible damages. So it was not ITN that bankrupted <em>LM</em>. It was <em>LM</em>’s lies about the ITN reports that bankrupted themselves, morally and financially. Despite their failure, those who lied about the ITN reports have had no trouble obtaining regular access to the mainstream media in Britain, where they continue to make their case as though the 2000 court verdict simply didn&#8217;t exist. Their freedom of speech has thus not been permanently infringed.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Concluding thoughts on Chomsky and the Bosnian camp photos</span></p>
<p>According to <a href="http://www.counterpunch.org/cockburn11052005.html" target="_blank">Alexander Cockburn</a>, “Chomsky&#8217;s enemies have often opted for these artful onslaughts in which he&#8217;s set up as somehow an apologist for monstrosity, instead of being properly identified as one of the most methodical and tireless dissectors and denouncers of monstrosity in our era.”</p>
<p>I am not an enemy of Noam Chomsky. But I am a strong critic of his position on the Bosnian camp photos because his repeated statements of purported fact indicate that – in this instance – he is an “apologist for monstrosity” rather than one of its “tireless dissectors and denouncers.” Although he says he only speaks about the freedom of speech issues implied by this case, he has to this day consistently made and repeated substantive claims about the status of both the visuals of Fikret Alic and the camp in which he was interred, while trying to elide the fact of those statements. Chomsky’s insistence on seeing Alic and the reporters who witnessed Omarska and Trnopolje as pawns in a story that puts an absolutist notion of freedom of speech above the issues of human rights and historical accuracy is, to repeat, very disturbing. In fact, it is worth than that &#8211; it is shameful.</p>
<p>In writing that the words &#8220;very disturbing&#8221; might be an appropriate description for my concern about his statements on the Bosnian camp pictures, Chomsky demonstrated he sees no need to engage with the substance of arguments that contradict his views. For one regularly praised as an important intellectual of his time, that stance is a problem. In the words of Amnesty International’s Northern Ireland representative, “we all have a responsibility to stand up for justice and to stand against those who would take away the human rights of the most vulnerable.” In this particular case, that means we have to stand against Noam Chomsky’s revisionist and unfounded claims about what happened and was reported at Trnopolje in August 1992.</p>
<p>(<em>I began drafting this post on 14 November 2009 &#8211; hence the URL date &#8211; but did not complete it or publish it until 16 November 2009).</em></p>
<div class="zemanta-pixie" style="margin-top: 10px; height: 15px;"><a class="zemanta-pixie-a" title="Reblog this post [with Zemanta]" href="http://reblog.zemanta.com/zemified/bee57898-d5c5-44a8-bb3b-172a327c34a0/"><img class="zemanta-pixie-img" style="border: medium none; float: right;" src="http://img.zemanta.com/reblog_c.png?x-id=bee57898-d5c5-44a8-bb3b-172a327c34a0" alt="Reblog this post [with Zemanta]" title="Chomsky’s Bosnian shame" /></a><span class="zem-script more-related pretty-attribution"><script src="http://static.zemanta.com/readside/loader.js" type="text/javascript"></script></span></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/14/chomskys-bosnian-shame/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>15</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Karadzic, photography and revisionism</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/09/karadzic-photography-revisionism/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/09/karadzic-photography-revisionism/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 09 Nov 2009 20:34:18 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Bosnian War]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Camps]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[ITN]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Noam Chomsky]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Radovan Karadzic]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Trnopolje]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=920</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The trial of Radovan Karadzic for genocide in Bosnia has begun in The Hague despite the accused’s boycott of the proceedings.
Amidst all the legitimate issues this trial will provoke, one problem stands out – the Karadzic trial has already become another plinth upon which the revisionists who seek to deny the systematic ethnic cleansing of [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The <a href="http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/europe/8328804.stm" target="_blank">trial of Radovan Karadzic for genocide in Bosnia has begun</a> in The Hague despite the accused’s boycott of the proceedings.</p>
<p>Amidst all the legitimate issues this trial will provoke, one problem stands out – the Karadzic trial has already become another plinth upon which the revisionists who seek to deny the systematic ethnic cleansing of non-Serbs in Bosnia can parade their prejudices. And in this pernicious denial, the claims about the alleged fabrication of pictures from Bosnian Serb concentration camps continue to circulate and play a role.</p>
<p>Last week, BBC Radio 4’s “Moral Maze” <a href="http://www.bbc.co.uk/programmes/b00nfqzl" target="_blank">hosted a discussion on the Karadzic trial and war crimes generally</a>. On the panel was <a href="http://www.instituteofideas.com/people/claire_fox.html" target="_blank">Claire Fox</a>, and interviewed as “expert witnesses” were <a href="http://www.davidchandler.org/index.htm" target="_blank">David Chandler</a> and John Laughland. (Thanks to <a href="http://kantinternational.blogspot.com/2009/11/war-crimes-and-moral-relativism.html" target="_blank">Gary Banham</a> for the pointer to this programme). What was never disclosed during the discussion was Fox’s and Chandler’s earlier association with the infamous attack by the <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Revolutionary_Communist_Party_(Furedi)" target="_blank">Revolutionary Communist Party’s</a> journal <a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Living_Marxism" target="_blank"><em>Living Marxism</em></a> on journalists who in 1992 reported on the Bosnian Serb concentration camps in the Prijedor region of Bosnia.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/11/Picture-11.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-922" title="Ron Haviv, Bosnian prisoners, Trnopolje, 1992" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/11/Picture-11.png" alt="Ron Haviv, Bosnian prisoners, Trnopolje, 1992" width="578" height="385" /></a></p>
<p><em>Photo: Ron Haviv, Bosnian prisoners, Trnopolje, 1992. Source:<a href="http://photoarts.com/haviv/ " target="_blank"> http://photoarts.com/haviv/ </a></em></p>
<p>As I have detailed extensively in my investigation “<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/photography/atrocity-and-memory/" target="_blank">Atrocity, Memory, Photography</a>,&#8221; a network of individuals originally associated with the RCP used the fundamentally flawed 1997 article “The Picture that Fooled the World” to claim the western media (especially ITN) fabricated images of emaciated victims in Bosnia in order to legitimize US military intervention in the region. The simple fact that the 1992 reports did not lead to any such response, and that the claims about the journalists have been proven wrong, has never deterred them from persisting with the argument – as in <a href="http://www.globalresearch.ca/index.php?context=va&amp;aid=13130" target="_blank">this April 2009</a> article by Edward Herman.</p>
<p>Herman, of course, is a sometime co-author of Noam Chomsky’s, and last week also saw Chomsky’s role in the perpetuation of this revisionism revisited. <a href="http://www.belfasttelegraph.co.uk/entertainment/belfast-festival/reviews/chomsky-why-far-right-must-be-challenged-14546372.html" target="_blank">Chomsky gave the Amnesty International lecture in Belfast</a> on 30 October. AI’s Patrick Corrigan said Noam Chomsky’s message is as relevant for people in Belfast as it is for those in Beirut, Baghdad or Beijing:</p>
<blockquote><p>We all have a responsibility to stand up for justice and to stand against those who would take away the human rights of the most vulnerable.</p></blockquote>
<p>But not Bosnia, it seems. The Balkans are something of a blind spot for Chomsky, for he has become directly and indirectly associated with the revisionists. As I write in the second part of “Atrocity, Memory, Photography,” Chomsky lent his support to <em>Living Marxism</em>’s case against the journalists on the grounds of “free speech.” Although on one occasion he later back-pedalled by saying he wouldn’t have supported <em>LM</em> if its campaign dishonoured those who suffered in the Bosnian War, he nonetheless maintained that the journalists who witnessed the Bosnian Serb camps in 1992 “happened to be caught up in a story which is probably not true,” and that &#8220;<em>LM</em> was probably correct&#8221;. Under the guise of an absolutist defence of free speech, then, Chomsky has taken a particular, partisan and unethical stance on the conduct of the Bosnian War and its victims. For the oft-praised intellectual who bases his arguments on “fact” these statements are nothing short of shameful.</p>
<p>This background lead Ed Vuillamy, <em>The Observer</em> journalist who was at Trnopolje and other camps in August 1992, <a href="http://www.bosniak.org/open-letter-from-ed-vulliamy-to-amnesty-international/" target="_blank">to write an outraged open letter to Amnesty</a> protesting the organisations failure to hold Chomsky to account for these views and for giving him another public podium in the name of human rights.</p>
<p>Chomsky certainly gets an easy ride from sympathetic media. On 7 November, <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/nov/07/noam-chomsky-us-foreign-policy " target="_blank">Seamus Milne wrote a hagiographic paean for <em>The Guardian</em></a> to the man he described as “the closest thing in the English-speaking world to an intellectual superstar.” Milne concluded his story by declaring that “in the Biblical tradition of the conflict between prophets and kings, there&#8217;s not the slightest doubt which side he represents.”</p>
<p>Such adoration is prompted by their shared antipathy to US foreign policy. As far as it goes, there’s nothing wrong with a critical approach to American security strategies, but when the opposition to “US imperialism” becomes its own absolute and distorts any other considerations, then we have entered the terrain of political fundamentalism. And when fundamental opposition to any policy associated with the US leads individuals to sympathise with the policies of Milosevic, Mladic and Karadzic in the name of a progressive politics, then we are in very dangerous territory.</p>
<p>In Milne’s report there is no mention of Bosnia or Karadzic. Perhaps that is because Chomsky and <em>The Guardian</em> have clashed previously on his attitude to the war in the Balkans. In 2005 Emma Brockes interviewed Chomsky after he was nominated as the world’s leading intellectual. Brockes commendably asked some tough questions of Chomsky including his apparent endorsement of Diana Johnstone’s book <em>Fools Crusade, </em>which has a revisionist chapter on Srebrenica.</p>
<p>Chomsky objected to the way the interview was written up, and <a href="http://www.medialens.org/alerts/05/051121_smearing_chomsky_the_guardian.php" target="_blank">his supporters endorsed his concern</a>. That interview is no longer available on <em>The Guardian</em> after <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2005/nov/17/pressandpublishing.corrections" target="_blank">the paper apologised to Chomsky for its presentation</a>, though it can still be read <a href="http://www.glypx.com/BalkanWitness/Brockes.htm" target="_blank">here</a>. And it deserves another read in order to understand Chomsky on the Balkans.</p>
<p>In the subsequent controversy, Chomsky sidestepped the issue of what he really thought and said about Bosnia with the same freedom of speech defence he used in relation to <em>LM</em>. As <em>The Guardian’s </em>readers’ editor wrote in upholding his complaints, “Both Prof Chomsky and Ms Johnstone…have made it clear that Prof Chomsky&#8217;s support for Ms Johnstone, made in the form of an open letter with other signatories, related entirely to her right to freedom of speech.”</p>
<p>This is not a full and fair statement, as “freedom of speech” for Chomsky masks what appears to be a much deeper commitment to the revisionist account of the Balkan wars.</p>
<p>Chomsky’s original involvement came about after an interview with Diana Johnstone, discussing her book’s claims about the Balkans, appeared in the summer 2003 issue of the Swedish magazine <em>Ordfront</em>, illustrated with the famous photograph of Fikret Alic at Trnopolje. That interview prompted a media storm in Sweden (including the resignation of the magazine editor and an apology to survivors of the war), a seemingly partisan account of which can be read <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/11/Ordfront-debate.pdf">here</a>. I cannot comment on the details of the whole issue – except to note that this document on the Swedish debate also takes <em>LM</em>’s position with regard to the Trnopolje pictures – but in relation to Chomsky we can see two things from this. First, Chomsky signed a statement that said:</p>
<blockquote><p>We regard Diana Johnstone‘s <em>Fools‘ Crusade </em>as an outstanding work, dissenting from the mainstream view but doing so by an appeal to fact and reason, in a great tradition.</p></blockquote>
<p>This “outstanding work” calls the truth of the Srebrenica massacre into question, and continues to recycle the canard about the pictures from the Bosnian Serb camps originally published by <em>LM</em> (Oliver Kamm has <a href="http://oliverkamm.typepad.com/blog/2006/03/chomsky_the_gua.html" target="_blank">more details here</a>). The letter Chomsky signed did go on to say “but whatever opinion one may have of that book, there are more fundamental issues at stake, namely freedom of expression and the right to express dissenting views.” Nonetheless, it is clear <a href="http://www.manifest.se/balkan/chomsky.html" target="_blank">Chomsky thinks highly of Johnstone’s book</a>. In a letter to Swedish friends, Chomsky engaged the substance of the debate in that country to defend particular points in Johnstone’s book, amongst which he includes further favourable references to <em>LM</em>. In general Chomsky concludes:</p>
<blockquote><p>Johnstone argues – and, in fact, clearly demonstrates – that a good deal of what has been charged has no basis in fact, and much of it is pure fabrication.</p></blockquote>
<p>This is a long way beyond defending people’s right to speak even if they are wrong.</p>
<p>If you think this is all passé, then remember that the veracity of a 17-year-old picture remains the foundation for revisionist accounts of the Bosnian War. It is a curious testament to the power of imagery, but one we should never let pass without critical comment.</p>
<p>Although Chomsky and allies claim the mantle of progressive politics for their critiques of their Balkans, they are in partnership with British conservatives and Eurosceptics such as John Laughland, who has detailed his primary concern for the plight of the Bosnian Serbs <a href="http://www.brusselsjournal.com/node/3436" target="_blank">here</a>, or Daniel Hannan (see <a href="http://blogs.telegraph.co.uk/news/danielhannan/4695095/The_Radovan_Karadzic_trial_will_be_a_travesty/" target="_blank">here</a>). This replicates the alliances between the <em>LM</em> crowd and the libertarian right in the US.</p>
<p>Although these individuals argue in terms of the threats to “free speech” they are in privileged positions from which they contribute regularly to the mainstream media, frequently appearing on the BBC, writing columns for national newspapers and contributing to on-line journals with the time and space to peddle their disinformation. The voices that go unheard most often are those who were photographed in the Bosnian Serb camps of the Prijedor region. It is their freedom and speech progressives should be most concerned about, and if the Karadzic trial can contribute to that goal, it will have been worthwhile.</p>
<div class="zemanta-pixie" style="margin-top: 10px; height: 15px;"><a class="zemanta-pixie-a" title="Reblog this post [with Zemanta]" href="http://reblog.zemanta.com/zemified/48bb7582-9182-4e68-a0e7-ea748f3ce3b9/"><img class="zemanta-pixie-img" style="border: medium none; float: right;" src="http://img.zemanta.com/reblog_c.png?x-id=48bb7582-9182-4e68-a0e7-ea748f3ce3b9" alt="Reblog this post [with Zemanta]" title="Karadzic, photography and revisionism" /></a><span class="zem-script more-related pretty-attribution"><script src="http://static.zemanta.com/readside/loader.js" type="text/javascript"></script></span></div>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/11/09/karadzic-photography-revisionism/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>2</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Revolutions in the media economy (4) – disturbing the university</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/10/01/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-4/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/10/01/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-4/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 01 Oct 2009 19:36:40 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[education]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[media economy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[academic publishing]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[university]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=892</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The social media revolution I have been exploring in this series of posts has disrupted journalism and challenged photojournalism. That is because – as Clay Shirkey makes clear in Here Comes Everybody – the web has not simply introduced a new competitor into the old media ecosystem; it has created a fundamentally different ecosystem.
At the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The social media revolution I have been exploring in this series of posts has disrupted journalism and challenged photojournalism. That is because – as Clay Shirkey makes clear in <em>Here Comes Everybody</em> – the web has not simply introduced a new competitor into the old media ecosystem; it has created a fundamentally different ecosystem.</p>
<p>At the heart of these changes is the fact (which I will continue to repeat endlessly) that the link between information and its distribution has now been broken. The web has collapsed the cost of publishing, removed obstacles to creating new social groups and eliminated barriers to the formation of distributed networks. This means, as Shirkey argues, while social tools don’t create collective action, they have overcome the majority of obstacles to such action. We therefore live in a remarkable time where our ability to communicate, share, collaborate and act has expanded beyond the limits of traditional institutions.</p>
<p>No sector of society will escape these revolutions. The question is how they will react to them and develop with them. Now it is time to turn the focus to the institution I am formally associated with – the university, and the associated issue of academic publishing.</p>
<p>As sites central to the production and dissemination of knowledge, the modern university finds itself in the new media economy occupying a position with many parallels to the established newspaper or photo agency. This post will explore how these institutions are largely failing to grasp the opportunities arising from these revolutions. This is because university managers are wedded to some very traditional modes of distributing information – with ‘distribution’ incorporating both aspects of teaching and the bulk of academic publishing – that need to be challenged.</p>
<p>Of course, given the diversity in higher education, such generalisations always have exceptions. But drawing on my experience in Australia and the US, but coloured most obviously by the last decade working in the UK, I will argue that if we are to progress as these revolutions shake down, universities are going to have to grasp what flows from breaking the link between information and distribution.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What happens when we move from mass production to the link economy?</span></p>
<p>The forces of mass production have shaped universities. Knowledge is divided into disciplines, experts variously distribute content to audiences (often in lectures that resemble monks delivering sermons), and auditors judge their enterprise through measurements of supposed utility.</p>
<p>It is hardly surprising, then, having detailed how the new ecosystem of the link economy transforms the creation of value, Jeff Jarvis asked: “Who needs a university when we have Google?” (<em>What Would Google Do</em>, 210).</p>
<p>That is designed to take a professor’s breath away. In claiming that course work involves memorizing facts available through search, Jarvis ignores the many educators who have always been concerned with process rather than product in learning. But his question is a great one if we want to address how our institutions are going to adapt. For Jarvis the link economy makes five demands:</p>
<ul>
<li>Produce unique content with clear value</li>
<li>Open up so you can be found; if you aren’t searchable you won’t be located;</li>
<li>When you get links and audience, find ways to benefit from them;</li>
<li>Use links to find new efficiencies; do what you do best and link to the rest;</li>
<li>Find opportunities to create value atop this link layer</li>
</ul>
<p>If you asked your average university administrator what this meant for them they would probably suggest nothing more than a web site redesign. Now, while I am one of the last people who would suggest universities should swallow whole the lessons from business studies (because wrong-headed attempts to do so are the cause of much anti-intellectualism in UK higher education at the moment), many of Jarvis’s principles should prompt us to think hard about what it means for universities in the 21<sup>st</sup> century.</p>
<p>There have been <a href="http://fcet-comments.blogspot.com/2009/03/applying-what-would-google-do-to.html" target="_blank">some practical reflections</a> on the implications of Jarvis’s arguments for universities, and we are starting to see assessments of <a href="http://www.businessweek.com/technology/content/sep2009/tc20090914_969227.htm" target="_blank">how the internet will disturb education</a> and make a <a href="http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2009/09/11/AR2009091104312.html" target="_blank">virtual college</a> possible, and even radical demands for <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2009/04/27/opinion/27taylor.html" target="_blank">the end of the university as we know it</a>.</p>
<p>I think Jarvis’s challenges demand more than even that. Thinking of research and scholarship in terms of ‘producing unique content with clear value’ makes sense <em>so long as value includes cultural and social value and is not simply economic</em>, and the idea of ‘creating value atop this link layer’ opens up creative possibilities for developing the idea of ‘curation’ (discussed in t<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/16/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-2/" target="_blank">he second post</a> of this series) in relation to how educators will use their expertise to enhance the process through which students engage with information.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What does it mean to go from broadcasting to engagement?</span></p>
<p>Opening up in the link economy also means altering the ethos of teaching, moving it away from the broadcast structure of the lecture to new modes of student engagement. Professors will cease to be people who &#8216;profess&#8217; and become people who curate flows of information, establishing the conditions of possibility for critical collaboration.</p>
<p>Earlier this year Don Tapscott  <a href="http://www.edge.org/3rd_culture/tapscott09/tapscott09_index.html" target="_blank">argued</a> this move away from distributing knowledge through the broadcast lecture would lead to the demise of the university because there was an inevitable clash between such lectures and “the natural way that young people who have grown up digital best learn.” The claim that ‘growing up digital’ leads to a ‘<a href="http://www.netgenskeptic.com/" target="_blank">net generation’ with some new, naturalised approach to learning is dubious</a>,  not least because schools and families share much in common with the traditional approach of universities.</p>
<p>Tapscott’s claims drew some <a href="http://www.huffingtonpost.com/don-tapscott/the-impending-demise-of-t_b_213702.html]" target="_blank">hostile responses</a> from academics, students and parents who were invested in various elements of the broadcast model. A provost from Georgetown typified the complacency of some by responding to the desire for universities to be “places to learn, not to teach&#8221; with <a href="http://www.edge.org/discourse/demise.html" target="_blank">the claim</a>; “Always have been. Still are. Hanging in there.” The &#8216;death of newspapers&#8217; would suggest such confidence in things continuing  as before can be fatally misplaced in the new media economy.</p>
<p>Of course not all university teaching proceeds by broadcast, and of course there are many who strive for engagement now. Nonetheless <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2009/01/13/us/13physics.html" target="_blank">MIT’s recent move to small group teaching</a> for its physics courses shows how persistent and popular the lecture as a mode of distribution has been.</p>
<p>The important work of <a href="http://www.academiccommons.org/commons/essay/knowledgable-knowledge-able" target="_blank">Michael Wesch</a>, a cultural anthropology professor, demonstrates how the new structures of digital information can address <a href="http://www.britannica.com/blogs/2008/10/a-vision-of-students-today-what-teachers-must-do/ " target="_blank">common student complaints about the broadcast model</a> (See further debate on this <a href="http://www.britannica.com/blogs/2008/10/brave-new-classroom-20-new-blog-forum/" target="_blank">here</a>). Wesch agrees that there are many educators who hope to subvert the system, but a combination of the physical learning spaces and the social structures of evaluation, promotion and tenure mean that too many efforts at engagement are constrained by the limits of the traditional institutions. Some proof of this is evident at my university, where the new “<a href="http://www.dur.ac.uk/its/theatres/calman/" target="_blank">learning centre</a>”  is dominated by two huge “fixed tiered seat lecture theatres” holding hundreds at a time.</p>
<p>The new ecology of the web and its impact on the structure of information requires a fundamental rethink of pedagogy.  However, this rethink does not mean that education inevitably migrates on-line. Students are often initially against change because they feel it is a step towards a virtual process with no personal contact.  What is needed, as Wesch argues, are ways to leverage the social media environment for a pedagogical process that is open, collaborative, linked, distributed, and above all else, engaging.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Why does academic publishing subscribe to pay walls?</span></p>
<p>If lectures are teaching’s mode of distribution, then journal articles and books are the primary way academic research is circulated. But if the link between information and distribution is being broken, we have to ask whether the article and the book are the best means to achieve the desired end.</p>
<p>As the author of many articles and a number of books, I am far from being opposed to them as delivery vehicles. The book, however, has long been under pressure (see the 2002 report by the Modern Language Association on “<a href="http://www.mla.org/issues_scholarly_pub" target="_blank">The Future of Scholarly Publishing</a>”). Universities that once subsidised their own presses have cut back, libraries who are the principal purchasers have slashed budgets, meaning that the vast majority of research monographs containing original work will sell a few hundred copies at best. (I once heard a photographer bemoan the fact his expensive book had sold “only” 7,000 copies – if only the bulk of academics could complain about such numbers!). The result is that getting research published via the book route has become more difficult.</p>
<p>Digital publishing might be one way to address this dilemma, but the question of reputations and how they are judged then looms large. The monograph remains important for how academics are judged by their peers for promotion. Having a book released by a university press is regarded as prestigious and a path to success, so opting to go with <a href="http://www.blurb.com/" target="_blank">blurb</a> or <a href="http://www.lulu.com/" target="_blank">Lulu</a> is thought of as a form of vanity publishing and not (yet) professionally possible. The social structures would need to change, but there is no reason why digital publication cannot also be edited and peer reviewed just like traditional presses.</p>
<p>While books are favoured in some fields, in the social sciences journal articles are increasingly the preferred mode of delivery. (In geography in the UK, more than 85% of  assessed research outputs were journal articles). But with these articles a perverse business model is at work. Academics do the research and write the article. They then submit it to a journal that is edited by other academics, which sends the paper to fellow academics for review. Neither of those roles is paid directly; the tasks are regarded as part of one’s professional commitments. If the reviews are good and the article is published, it appears in a volume that is then purchased by an academic who is an individual subscriber or a university library that is an institutional subscriber, or it might come as part of membership to a professional association that has subsidised its publication. If a company owns the journal title published in this way, the profits are predominantly theirs.</p>
<p>If newspapers had operated this way there would be no crisis in journalism – if media companies could get content for free and then sell it back to the people who produced it in the first place the return to investment ratio would have been phenomenal. With individual subscriptions of £25-50/year, and institutional subscriptions often <em>ten times</em> that, journals have become lucrative enterprises for many commercial publishers, hence the proliferation of more and more specialised titles.</p>
<p>In the terms of the current debate about the ‘death of the newspaper’ – where <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/14/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-1/" target="_blank">this series of posts began</a> –  this means that academic publishing operates a system of comprehensive and very high pay walls, behind which nearly all original research is corralled.</p>
<p>If the desire is for that research to have an impact on the wider community, these pay walls are an intrusive barrier. If someone outside academia wanted an individual article that was found via search, the payment demanded would be anything but ‘micro’ – I’ve just Googled one of my articles on war photography, and I see the university press publisher of the journal would charge £20/$30 for this single item! (It’s good, but there are limits…and I wouldn’t see any of that money anyway.)</p>
<p>The doubly perverse nature of this stems from the fact that university managers are requiring academics to publish in these pay wall-protected journals in the name of ‘impact’, at the same time as demanding that the research in those articles has a wider reach beyond the bounds of the academic community.</p>
<p>The particular understanding of impact here is the ‘<a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Impact_factor" target="_blank">impact factor</a>’, which measures the number of citations to articles published by a given journal over two years. Taking the total number of references to articles in one journal made by articles in other journals, divided by the number of articles published in the first journal, gives a number that is &#8216;the factor&#8217;. For example, the highest impact factor in a human geography journal in 2008 was 3.967. That journal published 60 articles in 2006-07, and those articles were cited elsewhere 238 times.</p>
<p>What is immediately obvious are the very small numbers we are dealing with – 60 articles being referenced 238 times over two years. Citation is a subset of readership, so this does not report the total number of people who read an article without citing it. But even if the readership is substantially higher, that comes from a limited community – those who have access to the journals behind the pay wall. Numbers detailing online usage of academic journals are hard to come by, but the one statistic I have seen (from another major human geography journal) revealed that in a year this publication had 80,000 global users – which in terms of web traffic is pretty small, but hardly surprising given the way this content is blocked-off from a wider audience.</p>
<p>The emphasis placed on journal impact factor as a measure of a journal’s importance has been regularly criticized, even by research scientists who are sometimes seen as favouring quantitative measures (see <a href="http://www.bmj.com/cgi/content/full/329/7471/0-h" target="_blank">here</a>, <a href="http://www.plosmedicine.org/article/info:doi/10.1371/journal.pmed.0030291" target="_blank">here</a> and <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/10/colquhoun-how-to-get-good-science.pdf">here</a>. These objections note how the statistics can be manipulated, but most importantly they reveal that although the impact factor has become an indirect scale of quality, playing a big part in career evaluations, <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/10/Area_20091.pdf">it does not square with the judgements of quality that peer review panels make</a>.</p>
<p>Journal impact factor is not the only quantitative measure of how academic research circulates. The delightfully named “Publish or Perish,” which is free software from <a href="http://www.harzing.com/pop.htm" target="_blank">Harzing.com</a>, uses Google Scholar to provide data. But whatever measure or package is used none can get around the fact they are only measuring some form of significance within a tightly restricted community.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">How can we really have an impact?</span></p>
<p>To drive academic research into journals behind pay walls contradicts the growing emphasis, especially in the UK, on such research having significance beyond the university. There is much that is disturbing about <a href="http://www.hefce.ac.uk/research/ref/impact/" target="_blank">this government-inspired effort</a> (which, as one newspaper headline put it recently, is designed <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/education/2009/sep/23/panel-funding-university-research" target="_blank">to weed out “pointless” studies</a>). It depends either on a remarkably narrow understanding of “impact” that <a href="http://www.esrc.ac.uk/ESRCInfoCentre/Support/Evaluation/evaluatingimpact/index.aspx#0" target="_blank">makes economic value primary</a>, or it depends on a extremely vague sense of impact (e.g. <a href="http://www.ahrc.ac.uk/FundedResearch/Pages/ImpactAssessment.aspx" target="_blank">contributions to “quality of life”</a>) <strong> </strong>that will be impossible to specify in the quantitative terms so badly desired by the auditors.</p>
<p>The problem with this bean-counting approach is also that it relies on a ‘broadcast model’ not dissimilar to the relationship between the student and the lecture. Researchers are supposed to, prior to their work, complete an “Impact Summary and Impact Plan” detailing who will benefit and how. This implies the one-way transmission of known findings to a passive audience, something that is underpinned by an extensive university bureaucracy tasked with enabling “knowledge transfer” and “public engagement” (usually understood as involving the mainstream media). This bureaucracy is  designed to extract academic research from the subscription silo to which the demand for journal publication has condemned it. When you factor in the enormous amount of time it takes to satisfy such bureaucratic demands, combined with the long-lead times of academic publication (1-2 years), then everything is stacked against the stated goal of impact in the broadest sense being achieved.</p>
<p>So what should be done?</p>
<p>The first thing to say is that thinking through the issue of impact in its broadest sense must <em>not</em> involve questioning the legitimacy of research or scholarship on what at first glance might appear to be an obscure topic. It’s common for non-academics to have a swipe at people in “ivory towers” pursuing things not popularly understood. But who is to say, prior to its circulation, development and reception, what will become significant, how it will become significant and when it will be significant?</p>
<p>That said, we can guarantee obscurity for academic research by cutting it off from the collaborations and engagements taking place in the distributed, global conversation that the new information ecology of the web makes possible. It’s counter-productive for university managers to insist, especially in the name of impact as assumed quality, on research being published by restricted outlets.</p>
<p>None of this leads to the conclusion that we abolish book publishing or end academic journals. It is not an either/or choice. What it means, though, is we have to modify those modes of distribution so they can take advantage of what the web had done for publishing, and then connect them with other networks of communication, dissemination and engagement.</p>
<p>Some of this is already happening, as detailed by <a href="http://michaelnielsen.org/blog/is-scientific-publishing-about-to-be-disrupted/" target="_blank">Michael Nielsen’s interesting account of the disruptions in scientific publication</a>. Specialist blogs, video channels, web journals of visualised research, and new ways of managing and searching papers are all emerging as researchers explore the new distribution possibilities enabled by the web.</p>
<p>Some time ago academics moved against the restrictions of commercial journals by promoting “<a href="http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Open_access_%28publishing%29 " target="_blank">open access</a>”  alternatives. While successful in some areas, these initiatives failed to defeat the traditional system because they could not offer, as new start-ups, the same reputational economy of the established outlets. But a journal is just a means of distribution, with its research value coming from its editors and the peer review system. When those individuals and their practices are prepared to jump the pay wall and publish content free on the internet, then we will have the makings of true open access and the widest possible impact, without the need for any bureaucracy to make it so. And making research available in this way will feedback into  changing the practice of teaching away from the broadcast model and towards an ethos of engagement.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/10/01/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-4/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>5</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Revolutions in the media economy (3) – photojournalism’s futures</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/20/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-3/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/20/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-3/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 20 Sep 2009 19:03:42 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[media economy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[journalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[multimedia]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=857</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[How do the revolutions in the media economy (detailed in the first and second post of this series) affect photojournalism? Given both the crisis in the distribution of information and the new opportunities for the structure of information, what futures are there for photojournalism?
This assumes ‘photojournalism’ is an accepted category of photographic practice.  It is [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>How do the revolutions in the media economy (detailed in the <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/14/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-1/" target="_blank">first</a> and <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/16/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-2/" target="_blank">second</a> post of this series) affect photojournalism? Given both the crisis in the distribution of information and the new opportunities for the structure of information, what futures are there for photojournalism?</p>
<p>This assumes ‘photojournalism’ is an accepted category of photographic practice.  It is an essentially contested category – there are a number of different accounts of what is or isn’t photojournalism, many photographers are happy to wear the label and may are not. I’ll call photojournalism the photographic practice where someone tells a story about some aspect of their world, where this story is compiled first using lens-based imaging technologies that have a relationship with that world. This encompasses what others call documentary or editorial photography, but excludes works of visual fiction produced with computer-generated images.</p>
<p>Of all the journalistic forms said to have died, none have had their demise declared more often than photojournalism. The recent <em><a href="http://www.visapourlimage.com/index.do;jsessionid=A9F82B86319716E17B27CD8C4F2BFC01" target="_blank">Visa pour l’Image</a> </em> festival in Perpignan was previewed with <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2009/08/10/business/media/10photo.html" target="_blank">articles</a> lamenting a “dying field” because of the revolutions in the media economy, but such warnings have been frequent throughout the recent history of photojournalism (as in a 1999 <a href="http://www.digitaljournalist.org/issue9912/editorial.htm" target="_blank">editorial</a> in <em>The Digital Journalist</em>, which was revisited in recent articles <a href="http://digitaljournalist.org/issue0907/revisiting-the-death-of-photojournalism-ten-years-later.html" target="_blank">here</a> and <a href="http://digitaljournalist.org/issue0908/revisiting-the-death-of-photojournalism-part-2-the-wires.html" target="_blank">here</a>).</p>
<p>Many of the concerns about the health of photojournalism have been well placed. The financial fragility of agencies like <a href="http://www.pdnpulse.com/2009/07/troubled-times-for-french-agency-eyedea-presse.html" target="_blank">Eyedea</a> and the liquidation of <a href="http://www.pdnonline.com/pdn/content_display/photo-news/photojournalism/e3i20d87dc1ece161eff8e49a076cb3e315" target="_blank">Grazia Neri</a> show traditional business models are faltering badly.</p>
<p>This is the beginning of the end of a long decline. The traditional model of print distribution and direct editorial funding has been unravelling from the 1970s onwards, ever since weekly pictorial magazines like <em>Life</em> folded. This demonstrates photojournalism that required an editorial paymaster was in trouble long before the Internet was an issue or the global recession added to its woes.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">How do photojournalists view the contemporary media revolutions</span>?</p>
<p>As a community of practice photojournalism does not have a single voice with a consensus view. There are photographers attuned to the new media economy and working in new ways. But there have recently been a number of notable comments that indicate the world of photojournalism is paying minimal attention to contemporary debates about the revolutions in the media economy, or resorting to some commonly circulated but ill-founded views on how to proceed:</p>
<ul>
<li>The photographic press is yet to explore in any detail the impact of the media revolutions on its constituency. For example, <em>Photo District News</em> had a <a href="http://www.pdnpulse.com/2009/06/if-the-journalism-business-fails-who-will-pay-for-photojournalism.html" target="_blank">blog post</a> in June 2009 that devoted a mere two hundred words to wondering (without discussing, let alone answering) “if the journalism business fails, who pays for photojournalism?” but it and similar organs are yet to offer more detailed accounts.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>One outlet that has offered a view is <em>The Digital Journalist</em>, which published two remarkable editorials in August and September 2009 – remarkable, that is, for containing some of the least considered commentary available. The <a href="http://digitaljournalist.org/issue0908/editorial-its-time-to-build-the-bloody-wall.html" target="_blank">August editorial</a> held the Internet largely responsible for the current problems, made the mistake of conflating newspapers and journalism, and plumped for pay walls around news sites as the answer. In manner that would have befitted the East German regime in its dying days, it cried out – “Let us build that wall before it is too late.” It is very odd to see a major player parroting the same flawed arguments of the traditional media outlets that have done photographers no favours in recent years.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>The <a href="http://digitaljournalist.org/issue0909/how-to-start-to-save-photojournalism.html" target="_blank">September editorial</a> of <em>The Digital Journalist</em> then demanded that foundations hand over large sums of money to multimedia publications (including itself), who would then distribute those funds to individual photographers with “projects that deserve coverage.” I’m a fan of the named companies who are a big part of the future (or, more accurately, the present) of photojournalism, but are the foundations really likely to part with large wads of up-front cash? Importantly, why would we want a system of new gatekeepers, and what about the fact that many of those digital producers are already partnering with photographers and getting foundation funding for specific projects? These arguments and proposals seem fundamentally out of touch with what is or likely to happen.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>In an <a href="http://www.johntemple.net/2009/09/pulitzers-lost-what-cost-cheryl-diaz.html" target="_blank">interview</a> with John Temple, Pulitzer Prize winning photographer Cheryl Diaz Myer endorsed paying for on-line content (“I’m a fan of micropayments for the web”). In a demonstration of how unfounded examples gain an aura of truth simply by being repeated, Diaz argued that if the news media followed the iTunes model or the <em>Financial Times</em> subscription system then things would be better – ignoring the arguments cited in my <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/14/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-1/" target="_blank">first post</a> of this series that demonstrate Apple’s model cannot be copied because music is a different commodity to news, and that the <em>Financial Times</em> and the <em>Wall Street Journal</em> are atypical news outlets that distribute economically valuable information.</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>Leo Hsu’s foto8 post on “<a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/982/226" target="_blank">The End of Newspapers</a>”  takes a novel tack on the debate by asking, “Without newspapers, without the received standards of print publications, what expectations will we have of photographs and their ability to speak &#8220;truth&#8221;? In the wake of renewed concerns about photographic manipulation (which I have discussed <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/17/photographic-truth-and-photoshop/" target="_blank">here</a>) Hsu is worried about how norms that contest fabrication will be governed. It is an interesting argument with respect to the veracity of images, but its assumptions about newspapers repeat the common mistake of seeing information and its mode of distribution as the same thing. It is the community of practice around photojournalism that establishes and governs standards, and that is independent of any particular mode of distribution, as the on-line debates about manipulation this year clearly demonstrate. Most importantly, contra Hsu, it is the practice of journalism and not the institution of newspapers that have, in some moments, sustained democracy. We must not confuse the two and their different roles.</li>
</ul>
<p>There have been some good analyses of the new media economies from within photojournalism – Aric Mayer’s review of the <a href="http://aricmayer.blogspot.com/2009/02/brief-incomplete-and-slightly.html" target="_blank">publishing crisis</a> and <a href="http://aricmayer.blogspot.com/2009/02/crisis-in-editorial-photography.html" target="_blank">the crisis in editorial photography</a> come to mind – but overall there needs to be a better recognition in the field of what is going on and what it means.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What inspiration can photojournalism take from the media revolutions?</span></p>
<p>Many of the recent debates within photojournalism have concerned the coverage of issues and the aesthetics of that coverage. In the wake of the last two World Press Photo competitions there have been insightful and provocative comments on how photojournalism pictures the world by <a href="http://www.lensculture.com/webloglc/mt_files/archives/2009/05/audio-stephen-mayes-keynote-le.html" target="_blank">Stephen Mayes</a> and <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/377/216/" target="_blank">Adam Broomberg and Oliver Chanarin</a>, which prompted some heated feedback (see <a href="http://www.jenshaas.com/blog/2009/05/26/world-press-photo-470214-pictures-later/" target="_blank">here</a> for the comments on Mayes lecture and <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/451/216/" target="_blank">here</a> for a response to Broomberg and Chanarin). Mayes observation that his years as secretary of the World Press Photo jury led him to regard the submissions to the contest as primarily “romantic” – that is, “marked by the imaginative or emotional appeal of what is heroic, adventurous, remote, mysterious, or idealized” – chimed with other critiques, such as Jörg Colberg’s thoughts on <span style="text-decoration: underline;">t</span><a href="http://jmcolberg.com/weblog/2008/10/some_thoughts_on_the_visual_language_of_photojournalism.html" target="_blank">he visual language of photojournalism</a>, which prompted an extensive discussion on <a href="http://blog.magnumphotos.com/2008/10/does_photojournalism_make_you_verklempt.html" target="_blank">the Magnum blog</a>.</p>
<p>These are vital debates even if there is no single resolution. My concern here, however, is with how the revolutions in the new media economy provide photojournalism with new opportunities for the future. These opportunities are made clear by thinking about what the changing structure of information does for photojournalism, and this changing structure of information will undoubtedly assist photojournalism in responding to the concerns about aesthetics and coverage of issues. Inspired by the themes of <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/16/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-2/" target="_blank">my previous post</a>, we can say at the outset:</p>
<ul>
<li>The web is where it is at. Photographers must not ignore the full range of outlets (print media, books, exhibitions etc) but the Internet is the only platform with a growing audience for news stories</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>To be on the web means producing multimedia stories. ‘Multimedia’ can mean many things, from simple photo galleries through to stand alone topic sites with stills, audio, video and text together, but it is the combination of sound and image which offers the basis for the most compelling form for storytelling</li>
</ul>
<p>To say as much is to state the blindingly obvious. Photographers have been using the Internet for years, but what is at stake here is something more than having a shop window on the web. It involves seeing oneself as a publisher of content and a participant in a distributed story, the form of which helps reshape the content of the story. Rather than just producing a single image or small series of images to be sold into another person’s story, multimedia on the web has numerous advantages for visual storytellers:</p>
<ul>
<li>It allows photographers to focus on a story, and produce more content with greater control over how those pictures are presented</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>While the meaning of visual stories can’t be controlled, they can be directed through the construction of a narrative that draws on sound and text as well as photographs and video</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>It potentially overcomes restrictions on getting longer and more complex stories published for a global audience, especially younger generations who do not consume traditional media</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>It is an effective response to the conceptual challenge of how to provide context for a photograph</li>
</ul>
<ul>
<li>It can overcomes photojournalism’s objectification of people by giving subjects their own voice</li>
</ul>
<p>This gels with the changing nature of the atomic unit of the news media discussed in the previous post. Running parallel to a shift from ‘article’ to ‘topic’ will be the move from ‘single picture’ or ‘photo essay’ to ‘visual story’ as part of the multi-dimensional narratives that make up a ‘topic’. Moreover, the visual story will be set in context, linked, updated and distributed across the web.</p>
<p>There are increasing numbers of photographers beginning to work in this way, as sites like <a href="http://www.interactivenarratives.org/" target="_blank">Interactive Narratives</a> or <a href="http://kobreguide.com/content/" target="_blank">KobreGuide</a> demonstrate. However, what I am trying to highlight here is more than a shift from taking stills to producing videos. It is about rethinking the capacity to tell stories in line with what Fred Ritchin calls a “<a href="http://www.pixelpress.org/afterphotography/?p=794" target="_blank">new visual journalism</a>,&#8221; which he outlined in greater detail <a href="http://www.pixelpress.org/afterphotography/?p=873" target="_blank">here</a>.</p>
<p>Ritchin has long been a leading proponent on these changes. Back in the  early days of the web (1996) he produced what is still one of the most innovative multimedia stories, “<a href="http://www.nytimes.com/specials/bosnia/" target="_blank">Bosnia: Uncertain Paths to Peace</a>,&#8221; which was organized around Gilles Peress’ photography and published by the New York Times. Ritchin analysed this production in a significant essay called “<a href="http://www.pixelpress.org/contents/Witnessing/index.html " target="_blank">Witnessing and the Web: An Argument for a New Photojournalism</a>”  and has recently developed these ideas in his important book <em>After Photography</em> where he outlines, conceptually and practically, a new practice called “hyperphotography.”</p>
<p>Hyperphotography is a “paradigm shift into another medium, or more precisely into an interactive, networked multimedia, which distances itself from conventional photography” (p. 70). For Ritchin this means &#8220;an entire photograph can…serve as a node, a hyperphotograph, an ambiguous, visual, uncaptioned, tantalizing segment of a developing conversation leading, if the reader is willing, to other photographs, other media, other ideas (p. 71). Far from being abstract, Ritchin&#8217;s concept has practical pointers on how information can be embedded in images, offering viewers the option of deciding which links they follow in a non-linear fashion.</p>
<p>This move from ‘photojournalism’ to ‘visual journalism,’ from ‘photography’ to ‘hyperphotography’ does not involve either giving up on the still image or abandoning the documentary function of photography. It might employ a variety of new media formats, such as those used by <a href="http://www.flypmedia.com/" target="_blank">FLYP magazine</a> or the <em>In a City </em><a href="http://www.britishcouncilworkshops.org/in_a_city/flipbookTA%20ex.html" target="_blank">flipbook</a> curated by DJ Clark for the British Council. Whatever its exact form, it uses the power of photography to help structure a multi-dimensional story that through its links, context and openness can be a strong form of evidence for the story it wishes to tell.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">How are photojournalists going to get paid in these changing times?</span></p>
<p>We have to constantly revisit this conundrum, but each time we get back to this point we have to remember something very important.</p>
<p>We can’t approach this issue via some misplaced nostalgia for a golden age that if it did actually exist certainly no longer survives. Photographic stories or documentary have always been difficult to fund directly. If there was a time when the majority of photojournalists simply waited for well-paid commissions to produce important work, that time is no more. We have to doubt though whether the past was like that, because in reality few if any photographers have been able to sustain a career entirely through editorial projects they chose to do. Even Sebastião Salgado had to do corporate and advertising work to cross-subsidise work on the social issues he wanted to explore, and Simon Norfolk sells his prints to a wealthy clientèle through  a fine art gallery in order to support his visual critique of the US military.</p>
<p>That means, as mentioned in the previous posts, funding is increasingly going to be indirect. This was confirmed by Stephen Mayes of <a href="http://www.viiphoto.com/" target="_blank">VII</a> in a an interview headlined “<a href="http://www.pdnonline.com/pdn/content_display/features/pdn-online/e3i8b95ac51de67e196d15ec26cbd94da1b" target="_blank">Inventing Twenty-First Century Photojournalism</a>.”  Mayes began by stating “as long as any of us thinks that we’re going to make money from selling photographs, I think that we’re going to be in trouble.” Instead he proposed this shift:</p>
<blockquote><p>[The biggest clients] have been the magazines and newspapers, and I still think that newspapers and magazines will continue to be incredibly important to our profession, but I think where previously we’ve seen magazines and newspapers as clients, I now see them very much as partners. At VII we’ll work with the magazines for distribution, but we’ll work with another party for funding, we may work another party for access and expertise, we may work with another party for technology. So what I find we’re doing increasingly is working on these multi-partnerships, amongst whom it’s hard to see who is the client.</p></blockquote>
<p>Mayes&#8217; thoughts were reasonably conventional in so far as magazines and newspapers were his primary distributors. Nonetheless, they  attracted some outraged comments, with two people alleging that journalism dies the moment one enters into a partnership with the subject. To which Mayes replied, “it amazes me how this question comes up only when discussing non-publishing partners as though the integrity of the news industry is somehow unquestionable. Like fish in water we often fail to recognize the constraints of our existing media…”</p>
<p>I couldn’t agree more. If some of the great photojournalists had adhered to this absolutism we would have been deprived of great pictures – think, for example of how a Larry Burrows needed the US military to get around Vietnam, or a Tom Stoddart required assistance from MSF to travel in Sudan. Of course partnerships vary and anyone concerned about integrity will have to work hard to maintain independence, but that applies in all situations. Aside from the fact the old editorial paymaster model is all but gone, the idea that taking money from corporate media funded by advertising, so that one can create content which will attract more viewers for that advertising, is free from all moral issues is…well, rather daft.</p>
<p>Nobody works in an ethically pure zone. VII has to face those issues with its sponsorship by Canon, anyone <a href="http://www.pdnonline.com/pdn/content_display/photo-news/photojournalism/e3i813900b0f9f5febd6e840e56f1bf8b3b" target="_blank">working with an NGO</a> or foundation needs to confront them too, and in accepting a commission from a newspaper or on-line site the same applies. Negotiating those issues requires transparency and reflexivity. Operating in the networked world of social media is one way to achieve that openness and integrity.</p>
<p>In the end, creating unique, quality content in a myriad of multimedia formats is the best way to produce value. We know great imagery on the web can drive traffic to sites and around particular stories, and where there is traffic there will be networks, relationships and the opportunity to find ways to fund that content. This does not mean multimedia, visual journalism or hyperphotography will kill off books, exhibitions and the printed image. But those  forms of distribution will comprise only a part of a successful photographers portfolio of activity in the new media economy.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/10/01/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-4/" target="_blank"><em>Next&#8230;what the new media economy might mean for universities and academic publishing&#8230;</em></a></p>
<p><em><br />
</em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/20/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-3/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>17</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Revolutions in the media economy (2) – the changing structure of information</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/16/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-2/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/16/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-2/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 16 Sep 2009 07:21:56 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[media economy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[journalism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=844</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Is there actually a crisis in news and journalism? We must not ignore the historical perspective that locates the current problems in the media economy, as my previous post detailed, but Jeff Jarvis is right – if we start from the assumption that there is a crisis for all concerned we will ask the wrong [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Is there actually a crisis in news and journalism? We must not ignore the historical perspective that locates the current problems in the media economy, as <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/14/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-1/" target="_blank">my previous post detailed</a>, but Jeff Jarvis is right – <a href="http://www.buzzmachine.com/2009/08/31/what-crisis/" target="_blank">if we start from the assumption that there is a crisis for all concerned we will ask the wrong questions</a>,  miss the great opportunities, and head off in the wrong direction.</p>
<p>It’s worth repeating what I think should be the guiding light for any discussion the new media economy: “<em>the social media revolution…is all about the separation of information from its means of distribution</em>.”</p>
<p>Following this means understanding journalism as information and newspapers as the means of distribution. As such, the death of the latter does not equate to the death of the former. <a href="http://richardstacy.com/2009/05/11/free-content-is-not-the-issue-its-free-distribution/" target="_blank">Richard Stacey</a> put it more bluntly – “hitch your fortunes to the information and you will prosper, chain yourself to means of distribution and you will die.”</p>
<p>If we are focused on the nature of the information there are opportunities. If like many of the traditional media companies we are preoccupied with the means of distribution, then there is most certainly a crisis. How, then, can we think about the opportunities and what they mean for the structure of information in the new media economy?</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">The web changes everything</span></p>
<p>The revolution in the media economy has few certainties, but one thing is crystal clear when it comes to news coverage – <a href="http://www.stateofthemedia.org/2009/narrative_online_audience.php?media=5&amp;cat=2" target="_blank">the Internet is the only platform with an audience growing over time</a>.</p>
<p>This growth comes from the new ways people consume information. While traditional sources such as newspapers, analogue TV and radio have declining audiences, <a href="http://publicserviceblog.wordpress.com/2009/05/08/lecture-to-falmouth/" target="_blank">the amount of time people spend reading, watching and listening is increasing</a>.  This is driven by the way – as American <a href="http://www.stateofthemedia.org/2009/narrative_overview_keyindicators.php?cat=2&amp;media=1" target="_blank">data shows</a> –  “people are relying more heavily…on platforms that can deliver news when audiences want it rather than at appointed times, a sign of a growing ‘on demand’ news culture. People increasingly want the news they want when they want it.” And satisfying that desire can only be achieved digitally.</p>
<p>The revolution, though, involves much more than making information available in a variety of accessible digital formats, as a recent German <a href="http://www.internet-manifesto.org/" target="_blank">manifesto</a> on the challenge of the web made clear. (Interestingly, this manifesto was a direct response to the <a href="http://gigaom.com/2009/09/08/time-to-take-a-stance-on-the-future-of-journalism/" target="_blank">Hamburg Declaration</a> in which traditional news organisation sought to tame the internet through new intellectual property rights to restrict fair use, make people pay for quotes and withhold the ability to link to content).</p>
<p>The web revolution changes the structure of the information that is being provided, and it changes the relationship between the producer and the consumer of that information. As an article in the <em>Columbia Journalism Review</em> recently <a href="http://www.cjr.org/the_news_frontier/something_to_talk_about.php" target="_blank">noted</a>,  “the Internet is a medium in the word’s truest sense. It is something that exists in the between. It is connective tissue.” And far from undermining the institutions of democracy, these transformations could be the basis for a more democratic culture.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">How is the structure of news information being transformed?</span></p>
<p>Traditional media deal with news as an information relay. On a daily cycle reporters gather information, construct a story (as an article or an item) before a fixed deadline, then transmit this to readers/viewers/listeners who some time later passively consume the information.</p>
<p>Of course, modern newspapers and television stations compress this cycle with their web versions, electronic comment facilities or rolling news networks, but the overall idea of a story as a discrete thing produced by a deadline remains. As the <a href="http://www.cjr.org/the_news_frontier/something_to_talk_about.php" target="_blank"><em>CJR</em></a> declared:</p>
<blockquote><p>News organizations have had trouble adapting to the digital world because they operate under a broadcast sensibility. They produce discrete bits of content—finished products meant for passive consumption.</p></blockquote>
<p>On-line media changes all that. Some have argued that the “<a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2008/oct/27/digitalmedia" target="_blank">atomic unit</a>”  of news media is changing. Marissa Mayer of Google <a href="http://news.cnet.com/8301-1023_3-10234622-93.html" target="_blank">told</a> a US Senate inquiry on the future of journalism &#8220;the structure of the Web has caused the atomic unit of consumption for news to migrate from the full newspaper to the individual article.&#8221;  This shift mirrored that in music when consumers moved from albums of music to individual downloads, and is driven by the fact that 80% of on-line users find their articles via search engines rather than through the home pages of particular sites.</p>
<p>The web’s challenge to traditional information structures might be more radical than a move from newspaper to article. The atomic unit might be no longer <em>fixed in space</em> as the article, the item, the page or the publication – it could be something that <em>evolves over time</em> via the post, the tweet, the link as a flow or wave of iterations that together produce a story that – like the world it is reporting on – is never finalised.</p>
<p>The changing nature of temporality means that a plural and inherently more democratic approach to news information is now possible. As Charlie Beckett argues, “<a href="http://www.polismedia.org/news/newsdetail.aspx?id=257" target="_blank">with the death of the deadline comes multi-dimensional narratives</a>.”  Rather than the tired old formula of “<a href="http://journalism.nyu.edu/pubzone/weblogs/pressthink/2009/04/12/hesaid_shesaid.html" target="_blank">he said, she said</a>”  journalism we can have competing perspective at the heart of every story.</p>
<p>This means journalism becomes a <em>process</em> rather than a <em>product</em>, and <em>the developing topic</em> rather than <em>the finished story</em> is the new fundament of reporting. As Jeff Jarvis <a href="http://www.buzzmachine.com/2008/09/30/the-building-block-of-journalism-is-no-longer-the-article/" target="_blank">argues</a>, this requires much more than having a list of links to other people’s stuff at the bottom of an on-line article:</p>
<blockquote><p>Instead, I want a page, a site, a thing that is created, curated, edited, and discussed. It’s a blog that treats a topic as an ongoing and cumulative process of learning, digging, correcting, asking, answering. It’s also a wiki that keeps a snapshot of the latest knowledge and background. It’s an aggregator that provides annotated links to experts, coverage, opinion, perspective, source material. It’s a discussion that doesn’t just blather but that tries to accomplish something&#8230; It’s collaborative and distributed and open but organized.</p></blockquote>
<p>There are some small but important practicalities that can achieve this – such as media organizations treating stories as topics under <a href="http://almightylink.ksablan.com/2009/05/topic-pages-for-journalists/" target="_blank">a permanent URL</a>, which Google’s Mayer <a href="http://news.cnet.com/8301-1023_3-10234622-93.html" target="_blank">recommended</a> as a way of constructing a “living story.” With the recent introduction of <a href="http://fastflip.googlelabs.com/" target="_blank">Fast Flip</a>,  a new user interface (UI) for news that aggregates individual articles and web pages via subjects, Google is leading innovation in this area. As Scott Karp <a href="http://publishing2.com/2009/09/14/what-google-understands-about-the-future-of-news-and-publishing-that-publishers-do-not/" target="_blank">argues</a>, this demonstrates once again how traditional media companies are failing to address challenges – new formats for presenting news – that should clearly by their concern:</p>
<blockquote><p>Most publishers are focused on how to charge for news. But there’s very little talk about how to innovate the packaging of news, much less a new UI for news. There’s very little talk about how people consume news on the web, about the value of aggregating articles from multiple sources, about solving consumers’ problems rather than publishers’ problems.</p></blockquote>
<p>Most importantly, rethinking the ‘atomic unit’ of information goes beyond any technological issue and changes the nature of reporting.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What does this mean for journalists and editors?</span></p>
<p>One of the fears flowing from the ‘death of newspapers’ and shift to on-line news platforms is that our capacity to sift important information from unsourced trivia will be lost. In typical fashion, <a href="http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2009/03/13/AR2009031302273.html?sid=ST2009040600157" target="_blank">commentators</a> see the end of one thing (stories by authoritative reporters) leading inexorably to its polar opposite (rumours by amateur gossips). It’s dreadfully easy to come up with examples of trash on the Internet and argue that it is therefore an unreliable medium. But, apart from the fact that the traditional news outlets produce more than their fair share of rubbish, there is nothing automatic or inevitable about digital media dumbing down standards of inquiry or reporting. As Taylor Owens and David Eaves make clear in their excellent review of the relationship between ‘old’ and ‘new’ media (<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/11/Missing-The-Link-Eaves-and-Owen.pdf">Missing The Link</a>), the rise of blogging is a boon for good journalism, in part because of the way it makes fact-checking an open source phenomenon that draws on the wisdom of the crowd.</p>
<p>The new structures of distribution affect the structures of information, but they do so by changing rather than eliminating the role of the journalist and editor. This is because the number of people who can write and publish without being filtered out by the mainstream media (as in this blog) is increasing all the time. But even for full-time journalists and editors in established news organisations a change is coming, and understanding their role as being a “curator” is what marks this change.</p>
<p>Instead of thinking as journalists and editors as the privileged insiders revealing secrets in a one-way relationship to their audience, they become those whose experience and knowledge allows them to give context and order to an ever-developing topic. Mindy McAdams has listed <a href="http://mindymcadams.com/tojou/2008/curation-and-journalists-as-curators/" target="_blank">seven different practices  that might make up this process of curation</a>. In addition to these will be commitment to real openness, in terms of encouraging a real-time dialogue with feedback from the audience, ensuring transparency about sources (without compromising confidents), and tapping into the power and wisdom of readers through “crowd sourcing” exercises (such as <a href="http://mps-expenses.guardian.co.uk/" target="_blank"><em>The Guardian’s</em></a> encouragement of its readers to sort through the raw data of politician’s expense claims).</p>
<p>The role of transparency in this new structure of information is vital. Showing how you get the story, and linking to others who have different but relevant aspects of the topic, is the best way to establish credibility and legitimacy for this mode of reporting. Indeed, David Weinberger has gone as far to claim “<a href="http://eaves.ca/2009/03/17/journalism-in-an-open-era/" target="_blank">transparency is the new objectivity</a>.”  In the past, media accuracy was achieved by a handful of editors and fact-checkers who verified data, but with thousands of interactive readers function as open source reviewers,  this accuracy can only be enhanced through thoughtful curation.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What might a new media organisation look like?</span></p>
<p>These ideas can guide the structure of a new media organisation, and if we summarise the points above and blend in the thoughts of <a href="http://publicserviceblog.wordpress.com/2009/05/08/lecture-to-falmouth/" target="_blank">Emily Bell</a> and <a href="http://www.chrisbrogan.com/the-next-media-company/" target="_blank">Chris Brogan</a>, with a dash of <a href="http://www.buzzmachine.com/" target="_blank">Jeff Jarvis</a>, we get the following pointers:</p>
<ul>
<li>The future of journalism is networked not silo’d, it has to be distributed not static, everything is modular, linkable and fluid</li>
<li>Everything must be portable and mobile-ready, and it has to be appropriate for the platform, using any means available which, in the days of Audioboo, flip videos and social networking sties, is pretty much every way</li>
<li>Stories are points in time, and won’t end at first publication, but become a flow of edits, links, updates, and extensions that together make a topic</li>
<li>Journalists and editors work as curators, and creators aren’t necessarily on staff. Contributors come in many shapes: paid staff, partner, guest, and conversational</li>
<li>Media cannot stick to one form. Text, photos, video, music, audio, animation, etc are a flow</li>
<li>Everything must have collaborative opportunities, and journalists and editors need the help of communities to build and engage audiences and to break stories</li>
<li>To be effective and trusted information has to be transparent and open to engagement</li>
<li>Advertising cannot be the primary method of revenue. Value-add services are another source of funding</li>
<li>Paper isn’t dead: it’s on demand</li>
<li>Above all else, produce unique content with clear value – that is, clear social as well as economic value</li>
</ul>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">A final thought about how to fund it</span></p>
<p>Funding new media organisations remains, so to speak, the million-dollar question. But think about this slide from the <em>Daily Telegraph’s</em> digital editor Edward Roussel, presented at a <a href="http://www.buzzmachine.com/2008/11/03/no-news-is-no-news-2/" target="_blank">CUNY conference</a> last November:</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/Edward_Roussel_slide.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-847" title="Edward_Roussel_slide" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/Edward_Roussel_slide.jpg" alt="Edward Roussel slide Revolutions in the media economy (2) – the changing structure of information"  /></a></p>
<p>It underlines the point from my previous post that if we think about funding in terms of paying for editorial content rather than the entirety of traditional media organisations, where the bulk of the cost goes on printing and distribution, we start with a much smaller need. If an existing news organisation like the <em>New York Times</em> was to be <a href="http://www.businessinsider.com/henry-blodget-how-many-people-the-new-york-times-would-need-to-fire-to-have-a-viable-online-business-2009-5" target="_blank">reshaped for a purely digital future</a>,  there would still be a major shake-up and much heartbreak, but it wouldn’t be the much-prophesied ‘end of journalism’. Because we are in a revolutionary moment no one knows how the media economy will shake down, but the outcome can be positive for the process of journalism.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/20/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-3/" target="_blank"><em>Next – what all this might mean for photojournalism…</em></a></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/16/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-2/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>8</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Revolutions in the media economy (1) &#8211; the context of crisis</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/14/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-1/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/14/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-1/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 14 Sep 2009 20:10:01 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[media economy]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[journalism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=767</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The way news and information is reported and delivered to citizens is undergoing profound transformations, especially in the United States and Europe. In the last twelve months commentary has been rife with claims about “the death of newspapers,” the end of journalism, and the impact this crisis will allegedly have on democratic politics.
In a series [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The way news and information is reported and delivered to citizens is undergoing profound transformations, especially in the United States and Europe. In the last twelve months commentary has been rife with claims about “<a href="http://journalism.nyu.edu/pubzone/weblogs/pressthink/2009/03/26/flying_seminar.html" target="_blank">the death of newspapers</a>,” the end of journalism, and the impact this crisis will allegedly have on democratic politics.</p>
<p>In a series of four posts, I want to consider the revolution that is reshaping the media economy through which we come to know about the wider world. This first post deals with the reasons for this upheaval and how it is changing the economics of news. Because of the ground to be covered in providing the context of these changes, this will be quite a lengthy discussion.</p>
<p>The second post will look at how the structure of information is changing in this new economy and what it means for the practice of journalism; the third post will ask what these transformation mean for photojournalism; and the fourth post will consider some of the implications for academic publishing.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What crisis?</span></p>
<p>In the US the transformation of the media economy has been mapped on <em><a href="http://graphicdesignr.net/papercuts/" target="_blank">Paper Cuts</a></em>,  which records company closures and job losses in journalism. With high profile newspapers like the <a href="http://www.editorsweblog.org/analysis/2008/11/christian_science_monitor_interview_part.php" target="_blank"><em>Christian Science Monitor</em></a> and <a href="http://www.seattlepi.com/business/403793_piclosure17.html" target="_blank"><em>Seattle Post Intelligencer</em></a> giving up print and moving on-line, and the <em>Rocky Mountain News</em> shutting for good after 150 years, the decline of traditional news outlets has been hard to miss. In the UK, <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/jun/16/half-local-papers-could-shut-2014" target="_blank">the local and regional press</a> has been equally hard hit, with half of that sector facing closure in the next few years. These changes may not be repeated globally, but it is clear the established outlets of the print media economy are vulnerable.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Structural changes or cyclical problems?</span></p>
<p>Because the upheaval in the print media has coincided with the international financial crisis of September 2008 onwards, we have to ask whether the global recession is to blame, or whether there are larger structural problems in the media economy that are now coming to the fore?</p>
<p>Newspapers have been in decline for a long time. In America, overall circulation (when adjusted for population growth) is “<a href="http://www.thenation.com/doc/20090302/alterman" target="_blank">about half of what it was in 1946 and is declining rapidly</a>”. That <a href="http://www.opendemocracy.net/article/a-surfeit-of-crises-circulation-revenue-attention-authority-and-deference" target="_blank">decline has been constant since the 1960s</a>, when other media, especially television, overtook papers as the primary source of news. The <a href="http://www.stateofthemedia.org/2009/narrative_newspapers_audience.php?cat=2&amp;media=4" target="_blank">decline in readership</a> by age has been constant for all groups, but given younger generations have always used papers less, there is no prospect of this trend being arrested in the future.</p>
<p>The way papers have been in competition with other forms of media such as television shows that the impact of the Internet on newspapers is not a qualitatively new phenomenon, even though it might be an especially important development. <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2008/dec/27/us-media-internet-newspapers-television" target="_blank">These changes were obvious</a> after the 2008 US presidential election:</p>
<blockquote><p>For the first time, more Americans are getting their news online than from traditional ink and paper, although the popularity of television still eclipses all other forms of media. In an apparently sharp shift in habits…the number of consumers using the web as a main news source surged from 24% to 40% in a year, overtaking the 35% who rely on newspapers. Television slipped from 74% to 70%.</p></blockquote>
<p>These structural changes in audience behaviour intersected with <a href="http://www.thenation.com/doc/20090406/nichols_mcchesney/2" target="_blank">changes in media ownership beginning in the 1970s and 1980s</a>. City and regional papers in America were purchased by corporations trading on the stock market, which meant shareholders rather than readers became the primary concern of management. Balancing the books to ensure profit meant that journalism was cut, which in turn accelerated the decline in readership as people went elsewhere for news. In recent times, <a href="http://www.opendemocracy.net/article/a-surfeit-of-crises-circulation-revenue-attention-authority-and-deference" target="_blank">these corporate strategies</a> have produced a further decline in journalism because servicing the massive debts undertaken to finance new acquisitions has required cost cutting on a grand scale.</p>
<p>The <a href="http://www.techcrunch.com/2009/03/29/the-wounded-us-newspaper-industry-lost-75-billion-in-advertising-revenues-last-year/" target="_blank">collapse of print advertising</a> revenues during the current recession is regularly cited as a reason for the death of the newspaper. But as <a href="http://www.thenation.com/doc/20090406/nichols_mcchesney/2" target="_blank">Nichols and McChesney</a> have written, this revenue stream has been in long decline too:</p>
<blockquote><p>Print advertising, which still accounts for the lion&#8217;s share of newspaper revenue, declined gently as a percentage of all ad spending from 1950 to &#8216;90, as television grew in importance. Starting in 1990, well before the rise of the web as a competitor for ad dollars, newspaper ad revenues went into a sharp decline, from 26 percent of all media advertising that year to what will likely be around 10 percent this year [2008].</p></blockquote>
<p>Long-term declines in audience and advertising, constant challenges from other media such as television, all hastened by debt-financed corporate strategies that put profit ahead of journalism, show that changes in the media economy will not be reversed even if the current global recession is followed by a period of renewed economic growth. They also show that the <a href="http://arstechnica.com/media/news/2009/04/the-newspaper-industrys-attack-on-google-misses-the-point.ars" target="_blank">constant sniping at Google</a> and <a href="http://www.poynter.org/column.asp?id=123&amp;aid=164672" target="_blank">craigslist</a> for &#8216;killing journalism&#8217; are way wide of the mark, even if both organizations have added to the current pressure on traditional news organizations.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Save newspapers or save journalism?</span></p>
<p>The current crisis in newspapers has led people to speculate at every opportunity about what strategy, product, technology or unknown revenue stream will “<a href="http://mediactive.com/2009/06/08/saving-journalism-one-idea-at-a-time/" target="_blank">save journalism</a>.”  There are two things going on here that need unpacking, because how we approach this question conditions the sort of response we can imagine.</p>
<p>First, there is the assumption that journalism, as routinely practiced in traditional news organisations, is a <a href="http://www.truthout.org/article/the-internet-is-no-substitute" target="_blank">public good essential to democracy</a> because of its history of challenging authority. To put it mildly, this is viewing things through rose-tinted lenses. It’s easy to think that each and every news organisation is run by people who see Bernstein and Woodward’s pursuit of the Watergate scandal as a template for daily reporting. But recent history suggests that much reporting promotes the interests of those in power (think about <em>The New York Times</em> cozy coverage of the run-up to the invasion of Iraq, which subsequently prompted <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2004/05/26/international/middleeast/26FTE_NOTE.html" target="_blank">an apology of sorts from the paper</a>) or recycles PR material (see Nick Davies critique of “<a href="http://www.pressgazette.co.uk/story.asp?storycode=40117" target="_blank">churnalism</a>”  in the UK, and the &#8220;<a href="http://www.10000words.net/2009/09/10-ugly-truths-about-modern-journalism.html" target="_blank">10 ugly truths about modern journalism</a>.&#8221;). For sure, we need critical journalism more than ever, and there are some good existing examples, but overall it is something to create as much as it is something to protect. With survey&#8217;s showing <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2009/09/14/business/media/14survey.html" target="_blank">Americans barely trust what they read or see</a>, journalism&#8217;s belief in its inherent social value is ill-founded and needs to be re-established.</p>
<p>It is important to note there that this faith in the assumed relationship between journalism and democracy comes in part from what Daniel Hallin calls the “<a href="http://www.jour.unr.edu/pcr/1601_2005_winter/commentary_hallin.htm" target="_blank">high modernist</a>” understanding of journalism  as “objective” and “socially responsible.” This journalism ran from the end of World War II until the 1980s, when more partisan and ideological coverage emerged, yet it is now being resurrected as the essential ethos of journalism rather than a historically specific form of the practice. Equally, we should not forget that the idea of objectivity as the defining characteristic of journalism was also <a href="http://www.niemanlab.org/2009/05/dan-froomkin-why-playing-it-safe-is-killing-american-newspapers/" target="_blank">central to corporate strategies</a> in the post-war period – the best way to maximise audiences for advertisers was to draw readers in via a promise of non-partisan reporting, because the advertisers’ clients did not want to be associated with controversy.  All of which underscores Hallin’s argument (revisited recently by <a href="http://journalism.nyu.edu/pubzone/weblogs/pressthink/2009/01/12/atomization.html" target="_blank">Jay Rosen</a>) that journalism in recent times has been less about fearless objectivity than producing the “sphere of consensus” for political debate.</p>
<p><em> </em></p>
<p><em> </em></p>
<p>Second, there is the assumption that newspapers and journalism are the same thing. While we certainly want to save the good, critical, contextualising bits of journalism, we need to understand the difference between the practice of journalism and the particular modes of its delivery. Saving journalism is not the same as saving newspapers. As Robert Picard has <a href="http://themediabusiness.blogspot.com/2009/06/end-of-journalism.html" target="_blank">argued</a>:</p>
<blockquote><p>Many…misunderstand the nature of journalism. It is not a business model; it is not a job; it is not a company; it is not an industry; it is not a form of media; it is not a distribution platform. Instead, journalism is an activity. It is a body of practices by which information and knowledge is gathered, processed, and conveyed. The practices are influenced by the form of media and distribution platform, of course, as well as by financial arrangements that support the journalism. But one should not equate the two.</p></blockquote>
<p>Journalism was synonymous with newspapers so long as there were no competing media. The advent of radio news in the 1920s and television news in the 1950s broke that link, but the current debate proceeds as though journalism cannot exist without traditional print media organisations. Yet the financial analysts Moody’s <a href="http://www.benton.org/node/25737" target="_blank">have called</a> newspapers a business suffering “structural disconnect” given that only 14% of their operating costs are dedicated to content creation (i.e. journalism) while 70% of costs are consumed by printing, distribution and corporate functions. There is no doubt that legacy organisations like <em>The Guardian</em> or <em>The Washington Post</em> carry important cultural baggage when it comes to producing credible reporting, but their journalism can be delivered to audiences much more cheaply and effectively through a variety of media, as is now the case with web sites, podcasts and the like.</p>
<p>This highlights what is most significant about new technologies in the evolving media economy. As Richard Stacey has <a href="http://richardstacy.com/2009/05/11/free-content-is-not-the-issue-its-free-distribution/" target="_blank">observed</a>, “<em>the social media revolution…is all about the separation of information from its means of distribution</em>.” Journalism is the information and newspapers are the means of distribution. The death of the latter does not equate to the death of the former.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">How do we fund the good stuff?</span></p>
<p>The Internet has solved the problem of distribution and collapsed the cost of printing (assuming widespread access to broadband, which is not something that can always be assumed), making almost everyone a potential media outlet. Plenty of people are making money from the web (especially pornographers), but how can this new technology of distribution be used to fund the public information we need? While good journalism has been under financial pressure for the past thirty years, how can the social media future be leveraged to support investigative work?</p>
<p>The first thing that is necessary in answering this is to resist the temptation (again) to look back on an allegedly golden age that has been lost. We have to recognise that news and probing journalism has <em>never</em> made money by itself in order to pay for itself. We should not, therefore, be judging the social media future for reporting via the flawed assumption that we are looking for a business model that will do what has never previously been done.</p>
<p>We have to recognise that the media in the twentieth century has always been corporate, and that journalism has always been funded indirectly. Oliviero Toscani once noted that editorial was “the advertising of advertising,” the content which drew in the readership to view the material the advertisers paid for, thereby indirectly subsidising that information. The idea of a newspaper as a publication containing everything from comics to sport scores to political analysis to clothing advertisements was simply a function of those ads requiring a large print format that was expensive. <a href="http://www.shirky.com/weblog/2009/03/newspapers-and-thinking-the-unthinkable/" target="_blank">Clay Shirkey</a> has put it succinctly by noting:</p>
<blockquote><p>The expense of printing created an environment where Wal-Mart was willing to subsidize the Baghdad bureau. This wasn’t because of any deep link between advertising and reporting, nor was it about any real desire on the part of Wal-Mart to have their marketing budget go to international correspondents. It was just an accident. Advertisers had little choice other than to have their money used that way, since they didn’t really have any other vehicle for display ads.</p></blockquote>
<p>The search for <a href="http://newsinnovation.com/models/" target="_blank">new business models for news</a> is occupying the minds of people much more knowledgeable than me. However, from reading recent debates it is pretty clear that <em>the </em>new model will in fact be a series of diverse models producing revenue indirectly. As <a href="http://www.johntemple.net/" target="_blank">John Temple</a>, the last editor of the <em>Rocky Mountain News</em> has declared, news organisations do not make money from news; news is the &#8216;brand&#8217; for the organisation and the money comes from relationships and services only indirectly related to journalism.</p>
<p>When it comes to the question of how to &#8216;monetise&#8217; journalism on the web, everyone is talking about “pay walls” – especially now that <a href="http://econsultancy.com/blog/4378-murdoch-s-new-monetization-plan-somebody-had-to-do-it" target="_blank">Rupert Murdoch has flagged his intention to introduce them</a> on all his publications in the next year. However, a large number of commentators and publishers believe they are not the answer. Why are pay walls not the future solution to funding journalism?</p>
<p>This has been a raging debate in the last year – see <a href="http://burden.ca/blog/2009/02/20/paywall-madness-dec-2008-feb-2009" target="_blank">this huge selection</a> of recent articles and posts from a short time – but there are few if any examples of enterprises successfully restricting the openness of the web. This is because the Internet, and the link in particular, has fundamentally changed the structure of the information economy, enabling a distributed and collaborative conversation happening in different places at different times (think about the composition of this post and the links it employs, for example). If people using the web by following links come up against a pay wall – part of a site that demands a small payment or subscription for access to a piece of information – nine times out of ten they will go somewhere else where information is free and accessible. The result is that the information behind the pay wall is cut off from the audience and the developing conversation, and the author of that restricted information has had their public impact curtailed.</p>
<p>How do we know comprehensive pay walls don’t work for most news journalism? Take the web site that emerged in the wake of the <em>Rocky Mountain News </em>closing. <em>InDenverTimes.com</em> needed 50,000 subscribers paying only $5/month to support their operation. The <em>RMN</em> had 210,000 subscribers before it closed so this seemed reasonable – yet <a href="http://blogs.westword.com/latestword/2009/04/investor_kevin_preblud_only_30.php" target="_blank">only 3,000 of those individuals</a> were willing to go on-line and pay for the new site’s content. In contrast, think of how <em>The New York Times</em> ended its TimesSelect subscription in October 2007 and saw its web traffic increase by 40% as a result (thereby making its columnist’s views part of the public conversation and boosting advertising revenue through a larger audience).</p>
<p>Even if we leave aside the larger questions of participation in the new link economy, a <a href="http://blogs.pressgazette.co.uk/mediamoney/2009/05/20/the-economics-of-paywall-publishing-its-a-niche-thing/" target="_blank">rough analysis of a pay wall</a> for Murdoch’s paper <em>The Times</em> suggests the economics don’t make sense. A common assumption for any business offering free versus paid versions is that only about 10% of the customer basis will migrate from the free to the paid. If 10% of <em>Times</em> readers were willing to pay, it is estimated they would generate between £4-8 million/year (excluding the administrative cost of running the on-line payment system). Given that the paper probably earns about £45 million in digital advertising, and that this amount would decline sharply with the lost audience who refuse to cross the paywall, thereby wiping out the revenue generated by the subscription if not much more, the value of the exercise seems dubious. And for a media company that has £445 million in revenue and £51 million in losses, the gain of £4 million+ seems hardly worth the effort even if there were no associated losses. On a different scale, a <a href="http://paidcontent.org/article/419-taking-the-plunge-how-newspaper-sites-that-charge-are-faring/" target="_blank">recent review</a> of small-town American papers that have instituted some form of on-line charging, usually to protect print editions, shows mixed results, with declines in on-line audiences. It is therefore no wonder that most publishers &#8220;fear they <a href="http://newsosaur.blogspot.com/2009/08/what-stops-publishers-from-charging-for.html" target="_blank">could lose 75% or more of their traffic</a> and banner revenue if they started to charge for content.&#8221;</p>
<p>Comprehensive pay walls might work if every single credible news organisation erected one at the same time, but that isn’t going to happen. In the UK <em>The Guardian </em>declared it will not follow Murdoch down the subscription route (partly because they recall the American audience they created while TimesSelect was in place), the BBC will always have news free for global users (albeit paid for by the indirect subscription of the license fee in Britain), and National Public Radio will continue to offer its 26 million listeners quality programming without direct payment (NPR’s executive director recently called the desire for pay walls a “<a href="http://www.buzzmachine.com/2009/07/28/pay-insanity/" target="_blank">mass delusion</a>”  of the media industry).</p>
<p>The desire to make pay walls a key strategy in the new media economy is historically odd given that news organisations have never relied on subscriptions for the majority of their revenues. As a rule <a href="http://www.pubpol.duke.edu/nonprofitmedia/" target="_blank">only 20% of newspaper revenues have come from subscriptions</a> with 80% from advertising. That means even if pay walls were somehow successful it would only ever be a very small success on the road to funding journalism. And as the only beneficial pay walls are likely to be small and partial – as part of a “<a href="http://www.avc.com/a_vc/2009/07/freemium-and-freeconomics.html" target="_blank">freemium</a>”  strategy that leaves general news open to all while restricting access to premium content – the revenue they produce is likely to be even smaller.</p>
<p>A common response to this argument is to highlight the small number of successful instances of subscription, such as the <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2009/08/17/business/media/17ft.html?_r=2" target="_blank"><em>Financial Times</em></a>, the <em>Wall Street Journal</em> or a consumer publication like <em>Which</em> in the UK. However, what  these outlets have in common is that they offer subscribers sensitive information with  financial benefits (often paid for by corporate expense accounts) or, in the case of <em>Which, </em>they provide impartiality through advertisement-free reports. And if someone argues that micropayments for individual news stories might be a better approach than a comprehensive pay wall then &#8212; aside from <a href="http://www.shirky.com/weblog/2009/03/why-itunes-is-not-a-workable-model-for-the-news-business/" target="_blank">questioning the idea there can be an &#8216;iTunes for news&#8217;</a> &#8212; we should ask if this is a good scenario: would journalists like their proprietors to judge the quality of their work by the number of consumers who had purchased their writing? Would serious investigative journalism compete well in an environment where <a href="http://www.niemanlab.org/2009/07/with-ad-revenue-up-35-gawker-media-returns-to-pageview-bonuses-and-plans-checkbook-journalism/" target="_blank">pageview bonuses</a> (like those at Gawker) were in operation?</p>
<p>That leaves funding journalism back in the troubled world of advertising, which as noted above, has been declining in print media for a long time. In the early days of the on-line revolution, it was hoped the vast amount of web traffic (“unique users”) going to sites would provide the basis for a new advertising model for the Internet. In part this has occurred, and on-line advertising remains a growth area in percentage terms even during the current recession. The trouble is that the values of this advertising is small, perhaps one-tenth of the print sector it is replacing. Except for Google and its distributed mode of advertising, “print dollars are replaced by mere online dimes” [Jarvis, <em>What Would Google Do, </em>p.125].</p>
<p>So neither pay walls nor advertising are the answer; what then? As noted above, instead of a single business model for journalism emerging, we are going to see<em> </em> a series of diverse models producing revenue indirectly (see the example of one profitable blog, Techdirt, <a href="http://news.cnet.com/8301-1023_3-10351205-93.html" target="_blank">here</a>). And that will bring journalism into line with other digital industries. Take music for example &#8211; it is rumoured that only 10% of U2&#8217;s revenue comes from its songs/albums. The bulk comes from concerts, merchandising, video games, advertising, sponsorship and any number of other sources. It&#8217;s going to take some creative accounting, but funding good investigative journalism will only be as difficult as it has always been, and largely achieved indirectly.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/16/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-2/"><em>Next&#8230;what all this means for the structure of information and the practice of journalistic inquiry in the new media economy&#8230;</em></a></p>
<p><em><br />
</em></p>
<p><em>(</em><em>These thoughts stem in large part from my presentations on &#8216;the political economy of multimedia&#8217; made to the <a href="http://www.photoma.org/" target="_blank">MA Photography programme</a> at the Dalian College of Image Art, China, in June 2008 and July 2009</em>. <em>I am indebted to <a href="http://twitter.com/djclark" target="_blank">Dave Clark</a> for making those presentations possible, and for our on-going conversation on these issues.)</em></p>
<p><em><br />
</em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/14/revolutions-in-the-media-economy-1/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>10</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographing Gaza – AP, Franklin and being political</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/11/gaza-ap-franklin-and-being-political/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/11/gaza-ap-franklin-and-being-political/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 11 Sep 2009 17:37:40 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Associated Press]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gaza]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Stuart Franklin]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=761</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Ten days on from learning that the Associated Press had forced Stuart Franklin to withdraw his essay about Gaza from part of the Noorderlicht exhibtion, questions and concerns remain about this affair.
The photographic press has failed to unpack the whole story, although the British Journal of Photography ran an updated account on 9 September. Neither [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Ten days on from learning that the Associated Press had forced Stuart Franklin to withdraw his essay about Gaza from part of the Noorderlicht exhibtion, questions and concerns remain about this affair.</p>
<p>The photographic press has failed to unpack the whole story, although the <em>British Journal of Photography</em> ran <a href="http://www.bjp-online.com/public/showPage.html?page=868499" target="_blank">an updated account</a> on 9 September. Neither <em>PDN</em> nor <em>BJP</em> have done more than produce what is a rather lazy form of <a href="http://journalism.nyu.edu/pubzone/weblogs/pressthink/2009/04/12/hesaid_shesaid.html" target="_blank">“he said, she said” journalism</a>. This is clearest in the fact that no one has (a) explored what the agencies other than AP who have photographers work in the show thought about the controversy, and (b) gone back and questioned AP further about the claims it made in their one and only statement on 1 September – claims that Franklin and Noorderlicht have subsequently questioned. I emailed the questions raised in <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/04/photographing-gaza-more-questions-in-the-case-of-ap-vs-stuart-franklin/" target="_blank">my previous post</a> to Olivier Laurent of BJP and Daryl Lang of PDN, but they did not reply.</p>
<p>While the photographic press has gone quiet on the issue, the big news this week was <a href="http://photoq.nl/articles/nieuws/actueel/2009/09/06/disproportionate-force/" target="_blank">PhotoQ’s publication of the second version of Franklin’s text</a>, which means we can read the words AP found unacceptable and ask – how political is the Franklin text,  were AP’s objections founded, and what would a political photography of Gaza show?</p>
<p>Like any argument, Franklin’s essay can be interpreted in a number of ways. It does not discuss any photographers or their agencies by name, and shows balance by noting the “atrocious cruelty evident on both sides of this long running conflict.” It states that Hamas rocket attacks precipitated the 2008 conflict and Franklin included in the exhibition pictures of the Qassam brigades preparing to fire on the Israeli town of Sderot.</p>
<p>On the other hand, Franklin’s criticisms are predominantly aimed at Israel for the “excessive violence and disproportionate force that one of the world’s largest armies has brought to bear on lightly armed resistance fighters and unarmed civilians.” Moreover, Franklin aligns the Palestinians with others (including Jews) as victims of “systematic ethnic cleansing.” As an analyst of international politics I would say that describing as Hamas as “lightly armed resistance fighters” and the violence as ethnic cleansing is problematic.</p>
<p>However, as the Noorderlicht organizers declared at the outset, there is plenty of evidence from international organizations to support the claim that Israel used excessive and disproportionate during Operation Cast Lead (as <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/08/gaza-terror-mercy-law/" target="_blank">my earlier posts on Gaza</a> showed). Only this week the Israeli human rights group B’Tselem released its report on the death toll from the Gaza war that contradicts IDF claims. <a href="http://www.btselem.org/English/Press_Releases/20090909.asp" target="_blank">As B’Tselem states</a>:</p>
<blockquote><p>The extremely heavy civilian casualties and the massive damage to civilian property require serious introspection on the part of Israeli society. B&#8217;Tselem recognizes the complexity of combat in a densely populated area against armed groups that do not hesitate to use illegal means and find refuge within the civilian population. However, illegal and immoral actions by these organizations cannot legitimize such extensive harm to civilians by a state committed to the rule of law.</p></blockquote>
<p>Franklin’s text is certainly a political account with a particular view. But how could it be otherwise? Is there an apolitical or non-political ground from which to enter the debate about the Israel/Palestine conflict? I very much doubt it. We can have better or worse accounts, arguments more or less supported by evidence, but none of them, whatever they claim, could be considered without politics.</p>
<p>This is where AP’s objections founder, and why their claims that photojournalism can speak for itself in some apolitical way is so naïve. Of course AP has to prevent its photographers from engaging in bias or being used for propaganda. But we have to understand being “political” is something very different from being biased, ideological or partisan. Being political is about being engaged with the world, and that will always be difficult and sometimes controversial.</p>
<p>As soon as photojournalists start to picture the world’s conflicts and problems they are inevitably being political. Too many shy away from this reality by claiming they are just impartial witnesses, acting as humanitarians, recording the face of the victims, objectively documenting what they see in front of them, or any number of similar self-understandings. To witness, be humane and work compassionately and fairly are all important values in photographic practice. But they don’t magically remove one from politics. Photojournalists and their critics need to negotiate the difficulties of their political world (e.g. by providing context to their stories) rather than pretend there is some safe zone in which they are immune from politics.</p>
<p>This means that for AP to force the withdrawal of Franklin’s text by alleging it was partisan is itself a highly charged political act. AP should have accepted the compromise offer to run the text with a disclaimer that it was a personal statement and did not reflect anyone else’s opinions (which was always the case).</p>
<p>The final, and perhaps most important, point to note is that the situation in Gaza requires a more radical political critique than that offered by both Stuart Franklin’s text or any of the Palestinian photojournalism exhibited at Noorderlicht. As I have argued <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza/" target="_blank">in an earlier post and a draft paper</a> on the photographic coverage of the war, what has been missing is a visual story of the permanent catastrophe that Israel maintains in and over Gaza. We need to move beyond the images of individual victims. We need a photographic account of the governance of all facets of Palestinian life that keeps the residents of Gaza on the brink of disaster.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/11/gaza-ap-franklin-and-being-political/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographing Gaza &#8211; more questions in the case of AP vs. Stuart Franklin</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/04/photographing-gaza-more-questions-in-the-case-of-ap-vs-stuart-franklin/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/04/photographing-gaza-more-questions-in-the-case-of-ap-vs-stuart-franklin/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 04 Sep 2009 15:41:54 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Associated Press]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gaza]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Stuart Franklin]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=754</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The controversy surrounding the forced withdrawal of Stuart Franklin’s essay in the Noorderlicht Photofestival exhibition of Palestinian photojournalism has received some coverage in both Photo District News and the British Journal of Photography.
Those reports don’t delve very deep into this issue. As such, there remain a number of outstanding questions that, given the importance of [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The controversy surrounding the forced withdrawal of Stuart Franklin’s essay in the Noorderlicht Photofestival exhibition of Palestinian photojournalism has received some coverage in both <a href="http://www.pdnonline.com/pdn/content_display/photo-news/photojournalism/e3i76e7bfe15f67e9f16162f1f9ba474e62 " target="_blank"><em>Photo District News</em></a> and the <a href="http://www.bjp-online.com/public/showPage.html?page=868190 " target="_blank"><em>British Journal of Photography</em></a>.</p>
<p>Those reports don’t delve very deep into this issue. As such, there remain a number of outstanding questions that, given the importance of the principles at stake, demand further investigation.</p>
<p>Because we haven’t been able to read Franklin’s proposed essay, it is difficult for anyone to offer unequivocal conclusions. This, however, is how <em>PDN</em> summarized the text:</p>
<blockquote><p>Franklin wrote a 700-word essay about the recent history of the Israeli-Palestinian conflict. (Festival director Broekhuis provided a copy of the final draft of Franklin’s unpublished essay, but asked <em>PDN</em> not to publish or quote directly from it. The AP confirmed it was the same text they reviewed.)</p>
<p>The text describes Palestinians as victims of disproportionate force by Israel.</p>
<p>The essay depicts Palestinians as resilient victims of Israeli violence and disempowerment. Franklin acknowledges cruelty on both sides of the conflict, and cites specific instances of violence against both Israelis and Palestinians.</p>
<p>The essay does not mention the Associated Press or any other media organizations, nor does it name any photographers. Franklin refers to the photographers generally, noting that they are mostly married men who worried about their safety as they covered the conflict.</p>
<p>In his final paragraph, Franklin likens the Palestinians to other groups of people who have historically been oppressed—including Jews—and says the exhibit is not politically biased, but biased on the side of justice, human rights, and international law.</p></blockquote>
<ul></ul>
<p>This summary would suggest the Franklin essay is in many ways unremarkable, offering opinions that many have voiced. Of course, there are many who will also object forcefully to such views, but one would hardly call Franklin’s essay radical.</p>
<p>1. <a href="http://www.ap.org/pages/about/pressreleases/wn_090109a.html " target="_blank">AP claims</a> it had a:</p>
<blockquote><p>firm understanding that the photos would speak for themselves and would not be used to support a political point of view…In early August, in an e-mail exchange with Photofestival representatives, the AP agreed to a brief text describing the origins of the photos and Stuart Franklin’s role in bringing them to the exhibition…When Mr. Franklin later sought to include his own additional text, the AP explained that his political commentary was unacceptable under the clear agreement that had led to AP’s involvement in the exhibition.</p></blockquote>
<p>In contrast, Ton Broekhuis, director of the Noorderlicht Photography Foundation, has <a href="http://www.beikey.net/mrs-deane/?p=2417" target="_blank">stated</a>:</p>
<blockquote><p>First of all, it is vital to understand that there have never been official and unofficial preliminary agreements between AP and Noorderlicht or Stuart Franklin, but the verbal indication that Stuart Franklin’s approach – I quote – ‘would highlight the photojournalism and be balanced’. [According to Franklin]: ‘I have honoured this&#8230;No discussion was held with AP about text or their apparent right to censor my curatorial essay until a few weeks ago.’</p></blockquote>
<p>Which account is correct?</p>
<p>2. According to <em>PDN</em>, Franklin selected images from 11 photographers who shoot for four wire services: the AP, Agence France Presse, european pressphoto agency and Getty Images. Did AFP, EPA and Getty ask for assurances on the accompanying text? Were they given any assurances? Did those agencies make any other stipulations about the use of their images? What is their view now?</p>
<p>3. What do the photographers themselves think?</p>
<p>4. According to the <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/Noorderlicht_AP_Stuart_Franklin.pdf">Noorderlicht press release</a>, AP rejected two compromise options: either a statement accompanying Franklin’s essay making clear it was a “personal opinion” and did not reflect the views of the photographers’ agencies, or some text from AP itself to counter Franklin’s essay. If this is the case, why did AP reject both these options and instead allegedly threaten legal action against the organisers?</p>
<p>AP spokesperson Paul Colford told <em>PDN</em> his organization did not want their photos “to bolster a highly charged political point of view.” Given this, why did AP agree – regardless of the nature of any accompanying text – to have its photographs included in the exhibition in the first place?</p>
<p>The Israel-Palestinian conflict is nothing if not highly charged in all respects, and as an organization AP knows this better than anyone. Their photographers are regularly abused – just read some of the scandalous comments posted on the <em>PDN</em> web site in the wake of this issue that speak of these professionals as “Muslim cowards” and “Arab propagandists.” Or consider the conservative bloggers who revel in calling any images from the Middle East they don’t like “<a href="http://michellemalkin.com/category/media-bias/fauxtography/" target="_blank">fauxtography</a>.” Or recall <a href="http://michellemalkin.com/2008/04/09/the-ap-and-bilal-hussein-story-is-not-over/" target="_blank">the vitriol</a> heaped on AP during the campaign to free their photographer <a href="http://www.ap.org/bilalhussein/" target="_blank">Bilal Hussein</a> from two years detention without trial in Iraq, which saw the AP logo disfigured to read “Associated (with terrorists) Press”.</p>
<p>Was AP simply afraid of further attacks from the right if Franklin was permitted to exercise his freedom of speech? If so, how is that a non-partisan stance?</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/04/photographing-gaza-more-questions-in-the-case-of-ap-vs-stuart-franklin/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>5</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographing Gaza &#8211; do pictures speak of politics?</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/01/gaza-do-pictures-speak-of-politics/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/01/gaza-do-pictures-speak-of-politics/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 01 Sep 2009 20:23:04 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Associated Press]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gaza]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Stuart Franklin]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=743</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Do photographs speak? Do they have an intrinsic politics? Or do they rely on the text that accompanies them for political meaning? An unfolding controversy about the photojournalism of Palestinian photographers contracted to western picture agencies is broaching these questions.
As I’ve written here, although many claimed that Israel’s media controls meant few pictures of the [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Do photographs speak? Do they have an intrinsic politics? Or do they rely on the text that accompanies them for political meaning? An unfolding controversy about the photojournalism of Palestinian photographers contracted to western picture agencies is broaching these questions.</p>
<p>As I’ve written <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza/" target="_blank">here</a>, although many claimed that Israel’s media controls meant few pictures of the IDF’s December 2008 invasion of the Strip saw the light of day, professional Palestinian photographers working for the likes of the Associated Press, Getty and Reuters were supplying images that got a good run in European newspapers.</p>
<p>The Noorderlicht Photofestival of 2009, which opens this week, is running work under the title <em>Human Conditions</em>, in order to “reveal the unseen, human stories behind conflicts.” One of the shows, curated by Magnum president Stuart Franklin, whose own recent work on “Gaza Today” can be seen <a href="http://www.stuartfranklin.com/ " target="_blank">here</a>, contains the Palestinian photographs. As the <a href="http://www.noorderlicht.com/eng/fest09/franklin.html" target="_blank">Noorderlicht web site explains</a>:</p>
<blockquote><p>Franklin travelled to Gaza to speak with Palestinian photographers. The exhibition Point of No Return shows their work: raw photojournalism that was done under the most difficult circumstances imaginable. The photographs by Mohammed Saber, Mahmoud Hams, Mohammed Baba, Abid Katib, Said Katib, Hatem Moussa, Ashraf Amra, Eyad Baba, Khalil Hamra, Fadi Adwan and Ali Ali rise above the level of detached reporting.</p></blockquote>
<p>However, it is not the Palestinian photographs that have sparked the controversy, but Stuart Franklin’s introductory text. The Associated Press objected to the content of Franklin’s essay, and wanted it “substantially moderated.” We do not have access to Franklin’s text, but  <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/09/Noorderlicht_AP_Stuart_Franklin.pdf">a press release from Noorderlicht</a> makes clear that AP objected to the fact that:</p>
<blockquote><p>the essay acknowledged that criminal acts were committed by both sides, but assigned the principle responsibility for the extent of the bloodshed to Israel. Both Noorderlicht and Franklin believe this conclusion is justified by the critical reports from Amnesty International and the United Nations…</p></blockquote>
<p>It seems AP threatened to withdraw their Palestinian photographers&#8217; work or pursue legal action against the exhibition organizers. Outraged by AP’s attitude, Franklin withdrew the essay and left the photographs without accompanying text, while Noorderlicht charged AP was acting contrary to any principle of free speech.</p>
<p>AP’s director of media relations  has responded to the disclosure of its threats <a href="http://www.beikey.net/mrs-deane/?p=2417" target="_blank">by saying</a>:</p>
<blockquote><p>Early this year, The Associated Press agreed to a request to display some of its images from Gaza at the Noorderlicht Photofestival, <em>with the firm understanding that the photos would speak for themselves and would not be used to support a political point of view.</em></p>
<p>The AP is an independent global news organization whose photojournalism stands on its own merits.</p>
<p>In early August, in an e-mail exchange with Photofestival representatives, the AP agreed to a brief text describing the origins of the photos and Stuart Franklin’s role in bringing them to the exhibition.</p>
<p>When Mr. Franklin later sought to include his own additional text, <em>the AP explained that his political commentary was unacceptable under the clear agreement that had led to AP’s involvement in the exhibition – namely, that the photos would not be presented in support of a political position&#8230; </em>(Emphasis added)</p></blockquote>
<p>Here we have a set of fascinating assumptions about the meaning of images. For AP, the photographs ‘should speak for themselves’, but they assume that ‘speech’ would not have been ‘political’, because it was only through Franklin’s text these pictures would ‘be presented in support of a political position.’ What, then, does AP think these photographs would be saying, in an apolitical way, when devoid of text?</p>
<p>Interestingly, Stuart Franklin says that the photographs are also going to speak, but presumably that they are going to say something different to what AP imagines it hears. As Franklin wrote in the <em>Human Conditions</em> catalogue after withdrawing his essay:</p>
<blockquote><p>I will say nothing and let the pictures talk. The pictures must speak and one day, we must hope, their stories will be told.</p></blockquote>
<p>I think both Franklin and AP are naïve in their view that photographs themselves speak, as though they could construct a larger meaning without text or other related media that put them in context.</p>
<p>However, in addition to their censorship of Franklin’s views, AP are especially naïve because the professional Palestinian photographs from within Gaza – such as the work of Getty photographer Abid Katib, which was among the first images of the war published in the UK (see one of his photos <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza/" target="_blank">here</a>) &#8212; have already been widely circulated and read with a variety of texts creating various meanings. To suggest that these photographs should now be stripped of prior associations and rendered ‘apolitical’ is itself the most political stance one can take.</p>
<p>(<em>A hat-tip to <a href="http://aricmayer.blogspot.com/" target="_blank">Aric Mayer</a> for a prompt on this issue</em>).</p>
<p>(<em>UPDATE 3 September 2009: I have revised the final paragraph to note Abid Katib is a Getty photographer, as was clear from <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza/" target="_blank">my earlier post</a>).</em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/09/01/gaza-do-pictures-speak-of-politics/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>11</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>From Ashes to Dust: Reviewing the 2009 series</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/08/29/from-ashes-to-dust/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/08/29/from-ashes-to-dust/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sat, 29 Aug 2009 20:11:22 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[sport]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[cricket]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=725</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The Sydney Cricket Ground, 6 January 2008. It is the final moments of the fifth day of the second test against India. In the last over, part-time spinner Michael Clarke takes three wickets to pull of an unlikely win that gives Australia the series with one match to play. Having just won 16 tests in [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The Sydney Cricket Ground, 6 January 2008. It is the final moments of the fifth day of the second test against India. In the last over, part-time spinner Michael Clarke takes three wickets to pull of an unlikely win that gives Australia the series with one match to play. Having just won 16 tests in a row, the team celebrated this great and unexpected outcome enthusiastically.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/Michael-Clarke-took-the-final-three-wickets-to-help-Australia-post-their-16th-consecutive-win-Australia-v-India-2nd-Test-Sydney-5th-day-January-6-2008.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-726" title="Michael Clarke took the final three wickets to help Australia post their 16th consecutive win, Australia v India, 2nd Test, Sydney, 5th day, January 6, 2008" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/Michael-Clarke-took-the-final-three-wickets-to-help-Australia-post-their-16th-consecutive-win-Australia-v-India-2nd-Test-Sydney-5th-day-January-6-2008.png" alt="Michael Clarke took the final three wickets to help Australia post their 16th consecutive win, Australia v India, 2nd Test, Sydney, 5th day, January 6, 2008" /></a></p>
<p>The sun had barely set on this scene when the Australian’s came under close scrutiny. Fuelled in part by India’s desire to deflect attention from the racist remarks of one of its team during play, the <em>Sydney Morning Herald’s</em> cricket writer (the English-born, former Somerset county captain, Peter Roebuck) launched a public attack on Ricky Ponting’s leadership and his teams conduct, and episode that is fully described in Adam Gilchrist’s unvarnished autobiography <em>True Colours</em>.</p>
<p style="text-align: left;">I thought about this scene again after England had beaten Australia at the Oval to regain the Ashes last week. So, in collaboration with my antipodean cricketing comrade <a href="http://www.ncl.ac.uk/gps/staff/profile/simon.philpott" target="_blank">Simon Philpott</a>, we decided to take stock of the 2009 Ashes series.</p>
<p style="text-align: left;"><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/England-celebrate-09.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-727" title="England celebrate 09" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/08/England-celebrate-09.png" alt="England celebrate 09" /></a></p>
<p>The photo of England celebrating the final wicket is a mirror image of the one from the SCG eighteen months earlier. Yet the English press reaction could not have been more different. The Roebuck critique of Ponting in early 2008 had been eagerly lapped up by the British media and led to some rabid comments in the blogosphere about the need to take the Aussies down a peg or two. Of course, none of this mattered once the roles were reversed and it was England who triumphed. Then the press could not get enough of the euphoria, the double standard notwithstanding.</p>
<p>Seeing one’s side lose the Ashes it painful for a cricket fan. It is doubly painful when you see it through the winner’s press. Trying to keep a reasoned view of an Australian team’s performance when consuming the English media is more than a little difficult. One has to get used to a certain imbalance in assessments and coverage. If you were to believe the home side’s commentary, Australian behaviour supposedly threatens the integrity of the game while England’s identical conduct is merely a manifestation of ‘good, tough, test cricket.’</p>
<p>For Australians, losing the Ashes is especially painful in 2009. In 2005 it was devastating too, but the urn was deservedly went to a side that played excellent cricket as a bonded unit for four tests.</p>
<p>The feelings about 2009 come from the fact that the losing side has won many battles and registered many successes. None of this changes the fact that if you come out of the series with 2-1 in tests beside your name your country rightly holds the trophy. But if we probe beyond the end of series triumphalism for a cold, hard look at what Australia did well and what it did poorly, we will have a better basis for thinking about what lies ahead.</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">The teams in context: who had the experience?</span></p>
<p>Since 2000 Australia has won 27 series, lost 5 and drawn 2. However, three of the 5 losses have occurred in the last 5 series. It is a wonderful record despite recent setbacks against teams, two of which, India and South Africa, are in purple patches of their own. England’s test series record over the same period reads 19 wins, 11 defeats and 6 draws. Interestingly, England’s recent record is identical to Australia’s – it had lost three of its last 5 series.</p>
<p>In the English media, the 2009 series was set in context via their success in 2005. Sky Sports promoted this through each and every lunch break with a programme detailing the “inside track” on English success in that series. Even some English cricket writers came to regard this backward view “<a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/sport/2009/aug/25/england-world-no1-cricket-ashes" target="_blank">irritating beyond measure</a>.&#8221; Airbrushed from history was England’s historic 5-0 Ashes loss in Australia in 2006-07. As one Australian journalist remarked on BBC radio’s Test Match Special – “you blokes love to talk about ‘05, but we like to talk about 5-0”.</p>
<p>This nostalgia was reflected in the repeated observation that the current Australian side did not have the “aura” of its predecessors, which had dominated world cricket since 1995. This bemused most Australians who recognised that with the retirement of Damien Martyn in December 2006, Justin Langer, Shane Warne and Glenn McGrath in January 2007, Adam Gilchrist in January 2008, and Mathew Hayden in January 2009, the 2009 Australian’s were necessarily a new and different unit. If there is such a thing as an aura it comes from sustained success, and having lost series away in India and home to South Africa – but then having beaten South Africa in South Africa – the current Australian team was at an early stage of its development and its performances were not always predictable or sustainable.</p>
<p>The statistics bear this out. If we look at the age and test match experience of both 16-man squads at the beginning of the 2009 series we find the Australian’s were much less seasoned than the English, despite being marginally older.</p>
<p>Australia average age: 29 yrs / England: 27 yrs</p>
<p>Australia average number of tests: 26 / England 30 tests</p>
<p>[Minus the leading test appearance of Ponting (131), the Australian average number of tests is 18. England, minus their leading test appearance (Flintoff, 74), drops to 25.]</p>
<p>Australian players with 25 tests or less: 11 / England 7</p>
<p>Australian players with 40 tests or more: 3 / England 6</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Performance statistics: who was best on paper?</span></p>
<p>The 2009 series is remarkable for the fact that the losing side had the superior statistical performance:</p>
<ul>
<li>In the five tests, Australia scored 2886 runs in eight innings, with England recording 2869 runs in nine innings. This gives an average of 360/innings vs. 318</li>
<li>Six of the top seven run scorers were Australian batsmen.</li>
<li>Six Australian batsmen averaged 42+, while only two English players did so (and one of those appeared in the final test only)</li>
<li>Australian batsmen scored eight centuries to England’s two. Prior to this series, no team in the history of test cricket had been outscored by six centuries in a series and won it. <a href="http://www.cricinfo.com/magazine/content/story/422102.html" target="_blank">No team had scored 8 centuries in a series and lost it</a></li>
<li>The average runs per wicket for each side shows Australia scored 40.64 and England 34.15 – the difference of 6.49 is t<a href="http://www.cricinfo.com/statsguru/content/story/421995.html" target="_blank">he highest difference between a losing side over a winning team in a Test series</a></li>
<li>Australia took 84 wickets to England’s 71. <a href="http://www.cricinfo.com/magazine/content/story/422102.html" target="_blank">Australia’s top three bowlers took 18 wickets more than England’s strike force</a>. Despite having played only three tests prior to the series, Ben Hilfenhaus, with 22 wickets at an average of 27.45, had most wickets and the best average.</li>
<li><a href="http://www.cricinfo.com/magazine/content/story/422102.html" target="_blank">On only 10 other occasions has the leading wicket taker in a series been on the losing side</a>, one of these the previous Ashes in England</li>
<li>As <a href="http://www.cricinfo.com/statsguru/content/story/422271.html" target="_blank">Cricinfo concluded</a>, &#8220;comparing the two pace attacks against the opposition top orders, it&#8217;s clear that Australia&#8217;s had the clear upper hand, as they did in most other statistical aspects through the series. Australia&#8217;s top seven averaged more than 44 against England&#8217;s five fast bowlers (the four mentioned above plus Harmison); England&#8217;s top seven averaged less than 32 against Australia&#8217;s four main fast bowlers (including Stuart Clark).&#8221;</li>
</ul>
<p>If you want to know why it is important to look at these statistics, then you only have to read <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/sport/blog/2009/aug/30/ashes-2010-england-australia" target="_blank">Vic Marks&#8217; remarkable report</a> in The Observer which claims Australia were beatable because &#8220;they had an ordinary bowling attack.&#8221; One week on from the Ashes and English journalistic revisionism has begun. Sure, Hilfenhaus and co. were not without problems, as we discuss below. But look at the above numbers and ask yourself &#8212; if Australia&#8217;s bowlers were ordinary, what were  England&#8217;s?</p>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">Why didn’t the team with the best statistics win?</span></p>
<p>To support the cliché that games are not won on paper, and that averages and statistics can deceive, the 2009 series demonstrates that <em>when</em> you score or take wickets is as important as <em>how many</em> runs you make or wickets you take.</p>
<p>Australia had three poor sessions and managed to spread them over three test matches – principally short periods in the first innings at Lords, Headingley and The Oval, where batting collapses in less than a couple of hours shaped the outcome, and resulted in the two lost tests. England too had three poor sessions, but confined them to their one loss, the fourth test at Headingley.</p>
<p><em>This means Australia concentrated its success and distributed its failures. In contrast, England concentrated its failures and distributed its successes. </em></p>
<p>This is what is behind the oft-repeated manta that a team has to seize those moments that come along in a game. England did this better than Australia. Failing to take the tenth English wicket in Cardiff during the first test in many ways cost Australia. Not only would it have put them 1-0 up, it would have changed the dynamic of the series, infusing an inexperienced side with extra confidence. However, a combination of time lost to poor weather, <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/sport/blog/2009/jul/15/ashes-ricky-ponting-cricket-spirit" target="_blank">more time lost to English delaying tactics</a>, and (most importantly) Australian’s bowlers performing poorly in the last couple of hours, meant the desired result was not achieved.</p>
<p>Remember too that it was in Cardiff that Australia’s batsmen scored four of their eight hundreds – for that to have been a meaningful contribution they needed to have won that test.</p>
<p>Of course, in terms of when you get to seize moments, winning the toss and having the best of the conditions helps. You can’t legislate for luck, but there is no doubt England winning four of the five tosses and getting to bat first (especially in the final test) was a huge plus for them in all cases except Headingly. Winning the toss, especially as the home team, confers great advantage with home teams winning 41% of all test matches since 1877. Touring sides win 27% of tests after winning the toss. <a href="http://www.howstat.com/cricket/Statistics/Misc/MiscTossAnalysis.asp" target="_blank">In winning 1 of 5 tests away from home, Australia performed just under the  average of 24.6% of tests won after losing the toss. </a>In addition, the poor umpiring decisions that hastened the Australian batting collapses at Lords and the Oval show that the introduction of the referral system from this October is both overdue and welcome.</p>
<p>Two other statistics reveal that timing is as significant as totals, and disclose that behind the individual successes of Australia’s bowlers lie some problems that need addressing:</p>
<ul>
<li>England’s tail – the batsmen coming in at positions six to eleven – scored 42% of their team’s runs (their Australian counterparts contributed 22% of their total). While that shows the failure of England’s top order batsmen in contrast to Australia’s success – and aside from Strauss opening, numbers two through five averaged a poor 15-38 runs each – it demonstrates that Australia’s bowlers failed to back up their early success and end England’s innings quickly and cheaply. In the first three tests, the English first innings was inflated by some 50-100 quick runs each time. This had the effect of shifting momentum and increasing the pressure on the Australian’s batting second</li>
<li>Extras – the runs conceded by the opposition’s bowlers – were England’s second highest scorer with 261 over the series. Again that underlines the weakness of England’s top and middle order batting, but it also shows that Australia’s bowlers were sometimes profligate in their bowling</li>
</ul>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What does this mean for the development of the Australian team?</span></p>
<p>The strong record of individual success in the series shows there is the making of a very good team amongst Australia’s contracted players. The deficiencies have come because those talented individuals do not yet function as a unit whose sum is greater than its parts, especially in being able to capitalise on openings and tighten up in moments of danger.</p>
<p>The goal has to be having a settled and performing team for the next Ashes series starting in November 2010. With test series against the West Indies, Pakistan and New Zealand before then, the final pieces in the jigsaw need to be put in place quickly during those nine games. That means in the foreseeable future there will be some changes, but not many, to personnel. Some possibilities include:</p>
<ul>
<li>Restoring Phillip Hughes as opener and backing his talents after working on issues with his technique to the short ball</li>
<li>Considering Mike Hussey’s place – a century in the final test after three poor series might not save the 34 year old. He has been the find of the last few years, and probably should have been in the team in 2005, but even if his 121 at the Oval is a rebirth of sorts, he is unlikely to be in the first XI by November 2010</li>
<li>In Hussey’s place could come Shane Watson dropping down the order (though only as a batsman as his bowling and pretentions to be an all-rounder remain weak), or a new face like Callum Ferguson, who has looked good in the one-day side</li>
<li>The development of spinners. Although Nathan Hauritz surprised with his control, consistency and wickets when picked (out bowling both Panesar and Swann in the games he played), he is not yet the most attacking option. Replacing Shane Warne was always going to leave Australia on a hiding to nothing, and countries like England are hardly blessed with abundant tweakers of test quality, but more has to be done in this department to ensure team balance, either by backing Hauritz and his competitors, or searching for new talent</li>
<li>Retaining Ponting as captain and senior mentor, at the very least through the World Cup in 2011. He has, even after the 2009 series, the second best captaincy record in the history of the game (winning 64% of the 61 tests in which he has led). Only Steve Waugh has gone better. Andrew Strauss has a 41% winning ratio, and the oft-praised (at least in England) Michael Vaughan won only half the tests he captained, and had a personal record vastly inferior to Ponting’s world class batting statistics. Moreover, Ponting’s leadership skills are widely respected by the Australian players (as Gilchrist made clear in his memoirs), and his plain speaking sportsmanship has <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/commentisfree/2009/aug/25/praise-ricky-ponting-ashes-cricket" target="_blank">even won him praise from an English newspaper</a></li>
<li>Reforming the role of the selectors – making them full-time and getting more recent ex-players into the role.</li>
</ul>
<p><span style="text-decoration: underline;">What does this mean for the development of the England team?</span></p>
<p>Predictably post-Ashes euphoria has led to the expected dreams of <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/sport/2009/aug/24/andrew-flintoff-england-return-surgery" target="_blank">world domination</a> being declared by a number of England players. Perhaps they will learn from the 2005 experience, when they slid back down the ladder while looking into the past, but the above statistics show that the current crop of England players, at least in current form, are a weak foundation for that aspiration. As such, their ICC test ranking of 5<sup>th</sup>, still below a de-throned Australia, seems about right.</p>
<p>As a former country captain, <a href="http://www.smh.com.au/news/sport/cricket/there-will-be-no-heady-trafalgar-square-parties-this-year/2009/08/19/1250362117843.html" target="_blank">Peter Roebuck lamented</a> the inability of English cricket to produce a consistent supply of test match players, as the selection of Jonathan Trott highlighted the continuing reliance on southern Africa players for a competitive team. Of those southern Africans, perhaps the coach, Zimbabwean Andy Flower, will do the most to keep goals realistic. <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/sport/2009/aug/25/andy-flower-ashes-glory-england-focus" target="_blank">He was quoted</a> as saying after the series win that England</p>
<blockquote><p>have got a long way to go as a side, we are still number five in the world and we&#8217;ve got a long way to go to be where we want to be. I&#8217;ve heard that phrase &#8216;dominating the world&#8217;. I think that&#8217;s getting a bit ahead of ourselves. We&#8217;ve got to get to number four first.</p></blockquote>
<p>Whenever England look to future series they fall back on two clichés: first, that they have a “young team” and, second, that wherever they are about to tour is “the hardest tour you can go on.” <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/sport/2009/aug/23/strauss-england-no1-test-team-ashes-oval" target="_blank">Andrew Strauss’s post-Ashes comments </a>did not depart form this well-worn script.  The above statistics about their squad puts the first claim to bed, and the observation about their forthcoming tour merely repeats what they have said in the past about going to Australia, India and even the Caribbean. To be sure, success away from home is something that has eluded recent English teams, and the up-coming four test series against the new number one team in South Africa will be revealing.</p>
<p>England’s reliance on home ground advantage has stemmed from the unique conditions they construct. As the only country to use the Duke ball because of its propensity to swing, England departs from a global standard. This series has also shown a desire to prepare pudding pitches without much pace or bounce. That was clearest at the Oval for the final test where the driest strip in living memory was on show. The quality of the pitch did not determine the result, but given that the summer had been wet, a dry pitch that saw the ball go through the surface from the first session onwards was clearly prepared in order to give England a great chance of the needed win if they won the toss, which they did. The unusual nature of this was widely recognized:</p>
<blockquote><p>Pre-match promises that The Oval would be its usual fast and bouncy self have not quite been borne out by the events of the first two days. Surrey officials insisted in advance that there would be “no cooking the books”, but Ian Bell described the pitch on the first evening as a “day three wicket” and one former England batsman present yesterday said he was astonished to see the truest surface in the land taking turn on day one. “I almost fell off my chair,” he said. “It’s good for England, but it’s definitely not a normal Oval pitch. [Lawrence Booth, “Ashes Diary: The Spin Doctor Drops In,” <em>The Guardian</em>, 22 August 2009, Sport, p.6]</p></blockquote>
<p>Furthermore, a county umpire told London’s <a href="http://www.news.com.au/heraldsun/story/0,21985,25967581-2882,00.html" target="_blank"><em>Mail on Sunday</em></a> that if the Oval were a county pitch it would have been marked poor, excessively dry and with excessive turn, with the home team docked 15 points in the domestic championship.</p>
<p>The <a href="http://www.smh.com.au/news/sport/cricket/australia-in-peril-on-dodgy-deck-prepared-to-order/2009/08/21/1250362213031.html" target="_blank">Sydney Morning Herald’s English cricket writer</a> Peter Roebuck had some harsh words in response to the pitch conditions:</p>
<blockquote><p>Far from playing hard and true, the strip was thirsty from the opening hour. Evidently the curator overdid it…Obviously England were intent on avoiding a high-scoring draw. In that case the Ashes could not be regained. Although rigged, the pitch was just about tolerable…England’s strategy was ruthless. Only the unwillingness to admit it stuck in the craw. Holier-than-thou posturing has little appeal.</p></blockquote>
<p>It is Roebuck’s last line that hits the nail on the head. Preparing an Oval pitch with characteristics diametrically opposed to its normal state is one thing, but pretending that no such thing has been done is quite another. The litmus test in these moments is to imagine what the English team and media would say if, say, Indian authorities turned Eden Gardens into a green top, or if Australia made the SCG a concrete-like surface for pace to determine a series decider. We all know that the charges of moral infamy against the home authorities would be ceaselessly indignant. Perhaps Andy Flower’s greatest achievement will be, should this imaginary scenario unfold in the future, to remind people of London 2009 and the fact that England will have brought it on themselves.</p>
<p>In the meantime, we are counting down the days to the next Ashes series starting in Brisbane in November 2010.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/08/29/from-ashes-to-dust/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>How photographs make Darfur mean something</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/07/10/how-photographs-make-darfur-mean-something/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/07/10/how-photographs-make-darfur-mean-something/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 10 Jul 2009 17:25:22 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Darfur]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=700</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The relationship between photographs and text in the construction of political understanding is often complex and frequently unclear. Although news photographs regularly present themselves as windows illustrating the world, the articles, captions and headlines with which they are associated can bind them into meanings at odds with both their pictorial content and the accompanying textual [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The relationship between photographs and text in the construction of political understanding is often complex and frequently unclear. Although news photographs regularly present themselves as windows illustrating the world, the articles, captions and headlines with which they are associated can bind them into meanings at odds with both their pictorial content and the accompanying textual themes.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/07/SSRC_Sudan_Guardian_5March2009_pp4-5.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-701" title="SSRC_Sudan_Guardian_5March2009_pp4-5" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/07/SSRC_Sudan_Guardian_5March2009_pp4-5.png" alt="The Guardian 5 March 2009, pp. 4-5" /></a></p>
<p>Odd conjunctions of this sort are common in the visualization of Darfur. Back in March 2009, when the liberal UK newspaper <em>The Guardian</em> wanted an image to accompany <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/mar/04/omar-bashir-sudan-president-arrest" target="_blank">the print story</a> of the arrest warrant issued by the International Criminal Court against President Omar al-Bashir, a photograph by French photojournalist Frederic Noy was chosen (in contrast to the web version, which has a portrait of Bashir). Showing a distressed baby boy &#8211; identified in the caption as malnourished &#8211; being vaccinated by partially obscured adults, it was taken at Koubigou refugee camp in eastern Chad. Noy would have had no control over the use of his image by a British newspaper, but the newspaper’s choice of this picture says much about how ‘Darfur’ has been made visually available to us.</p>
<p>As my earlier research on this topic has demonstrated (see my “<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/photography/" target="_blank">Geopolitics and Visuality: Sighting the Darfur Conflict</a> [2007]) photojournalism visually enacts the field it claims merely to document. In the case of Darfur, that visual performance has drawn on the established iconography of disaster in ‘Africa’ in which the political is rendered in terms of the humanitarian, and the humanitarian is signified by the bodies and faces of refugees.</p>
<p>Indeed, the vast majority of Darfur photographs have come not from the province but the camps in Chad, a product of the way photojournalists rely on international aid organizations to provide access to the edges of the conflict zone. My review of all the pictures used by <em>The Guardian</em> and <em>The Observer</em> in their coverage of Darfur from 2003 to 2005 showed that 43 of the 48 published photographs foregrounded individuals as symbols of the conflict, with two-thirds of these pictures focusing on refugees. And as <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/slideshow/2009/03/22/world/20090322-darfur-ss_index.html" target="_blank">Lynsey Addario’s March 2009 visual essay</a> of the Otash camp in southern Darfur demonstrates (these being the most recent set of photographs used by the <em>New York Times</em>) the emphasis on the face of the individual remains the most common pictorial form for a political story, even one about <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2009/03/23/world/africa/23darfur.html" target="_blank">the Sudanese government’s expulsion of humanitarian organizations from Darfur</a>.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/07/SSRC_Lynsey_Addario_NYT_22March2009.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-702" title="SSRC_Lynsey_Addario_NYT_22March2009" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/07/SSRC_Lynsey_Addario_NYT_22March2009.png" alt="Lynsey Addario, New York Times, 22 March 2009" /></a></p>
<p>In fixing meaning, either photographs or text can have the upper hand, depending on their particular context. As Alex de Waal demonstrated in his <a href="http://blogs.ssrc.org/darfur/2008/10/14/what-matters/" target="_blank">review of the Darfur essay in David Elliot Cohen’s <em>What Matters</em></a>, the ambiguities of Marcus Bleasdale’s photographs were expunged by the force of the accompanying text written by Samantha Power and John Prendergast, which ensured the reading of the conflict as genocidal prevailed. However, in the case of the news photographs of Darfur circulating in European and North America, I would argue that the pictures have trumped the words. By constantly reproducing the stereotypes of the refugee as passive victim, these images have made a humanitarian account of the conflict dominant over all others. In turn, these photographs have distilled identities to a fixed essence such that the conflict can be easily mapped in terms of a tribal war or genocide that pits “Arab” against “African”.</p>
<p>Regardless of whether photographs or text are triumphant in directing the political meaning of a conflict like Darfur, what is missing from both is an appreciation for the wider context, abundant complexities, and many contingencies through which the fate of millions is determined. Although no single media holds the answer, the challenge for visual journalists is to find new ways to tell the story of Darfur so that this lack of certainty can be cogently represented.</p>
<p>Photo credits: Frederic Noy, Lynsey Addario</p>
<p><em>This is a cross-posting with the <a href="http://blogs.ssrc.org/darfur/2009/07/08/how-photographs-make-darfur-mean-something/" target="_blank">SSRC &#8216;Making Sense of Darfur&#8217; blog</a></em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/07/10/how-photographs-make-darfur-mean-something/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographing the Catastrophe of Gaza, part 2</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/07/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza-part-2/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/07/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza-part-2/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 05 Jul 2009 10:51:04 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gaza]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=694</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The Observer Magazine has a cover story today (&#8220;A Life in Ruins&#8220;) about the aftermath of the Israeli invasion of Gaza. It details the on-going suffering, and is illustrated with Antonio Olmos&#8217;s portraits of Gazans living in their destroyed houses. His photograph of Shifa Salman (below) is a double page spread on the inside, with [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><em>The Observer Magazine</em> has a cover story today (&#8220;<a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/jul/05/gaza-israel-palestine-war" target="_blank">A Life in Ruins</a>&#8220;) about the aftermath of the Israeli invasion of Gaza. It details the on-going suffering, and is illustrated with Antonio Olmos&#8217;s portraits of Gazans living in their destroyed houses. His photograph of Shifa Salman (below) is a double page spread on the inside, with a similar picture of her adorning the cover. More photographs and short interviews related to the story are available in an <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/audioslideshow/2009/jul/05/gaza-israel-invasion" target="_blank">audio slideshow</a> narrated by the journalist Peter Beaumont.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/07/Picture-1.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-695" title="Shifa Silman in the ruins of her house" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/07/Picture-1.png" alt="Shifa Silman in the ruins of her house" /></a></p>
<p>Two things strike me about the photographs in this story. The first is their focus on individuals, especially women and children, as signs of the conflict and its aftermath. In this they continue a long tradition of imaging conflict by locating the story in the bodies of those most affected. While that is obviously important, it does mean &#8212; as I&#8217;ve argued in <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza/" target="_blank">my recent paper</a> reviewing the photojournalism of the war in Gaza &#8212; that the larger context of the political infrastructures through which the lives of these individuals are produced goes mostly un-pictured. This context is referenced in both the magazine article and the audio slideshow:</p>
<blockquote><p>And without concrete and steel, aluminium and glass, without tiles for roofs and cladding for stairs and bathrooms &#8211; all prevented from entering Gaza by Israel&#8217;s continuing economic blockade &#8211; no rebuilding has begun. For those who suffered most, the war continues.</p></blockquote>
<p>However, the blockade of Gaza that is central to the catastrophization of this Palestinian territory &#8212; a blockade which preceded the war and now shapes its aftermath &#8212; remains visually unrecorded. To be sure, picturing this political infrastructure would be no easy task, but it is time for someone to try.</p>
<p>The second thing that strikes me about some of the photographs in this story is the way individualizing the issue intersects with a portrait aesthetic that is widely produced. This is demonstrated in the newspaper&#8217;s promotion of the magazine&#8217;s content (below), where the pose of Shifa Salman shares much in common with the portrait of the South African botanist or the models showing off &#8220;the top 5 summer shorts&#8221;. With the background cropped, Shifa could be modelling her garb as much as signifying a political issue. Given this, the task of picturing the political infrastructure that governs life in Gaza is even more urgent.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/07/Picture-3.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-696" title="The Observer, 5 July 2009, page 2" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/07/Picture-3.png" alt="The Observer, 5 July 2009, page 2" width="547" height="599" /></a></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/07/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza-part-2/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographing the Catastrophe of Gaza</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 05 Jun 2009 03:45:23 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gaza]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=660</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Israel’s three-week war against Gaza was a devastating assault. Retaliating to Hamas rocket attacks, Israel’s military campaign caused the death of some 1,300 Palestinians and the destruction of thousands of buildings.
The story of this operation dominated the world’s media in January 2009, yet many felt that the reality of the conflict had been hidden from [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Israel’s three-week war against Gaza was a devastating assault. Retaliating to Hamas rocket attacks, Israel’s military campaign caused the death of some 1,300 Palestinians and the destruction of thousands of buildings.</p>
<p>The story of this operation dominated the world’s media in January 2009, yet many felt that the reality of the conflict had been hidden from a global audience because of Israel’s exclusion of the international media from Gaza. However, European newspapers published the work of many photographers from inside Gaza working for international news agencies.</p>
<p>To consider how this photojournalism visualized the conflict, I have been researching the coverage offered in the UK by <em>The Guardian</em> and its Sunday sister paper <em>The Observer</em>. I am presenting a paper on this research – “Constructed Visibility: Photographing the Catastrophe of Gaza” – at the “<a href="http://www.nocaptionneeded.com/?p=2983" target="_blank">Aesthetics of Catastrophe</a>” symposium today at Northwestern University in Chicago.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/06/observer-28-dec-2008-p1.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-671" title="observer-28-dec-2008-p1" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/06/observer-28-dec-2008-p1.png" alt="observer 28 dec 2008 p1 Photographing the Catastrophe of Gaza"  /></a></p>
<p>Much of the pictorial coverage offered a familiar – and often literal – face of war, as the first photo from the conflict, the injured girl on the front page of <em>The Observer</em> of 28 December 2008, demonstrates. While the victims deserve coverage, and it is necessary to see the consequences of war, does the rendering of the Palestinians as suffering subjects above all else provide a comprehensive visual understanding of the conflict?</p>
<p>Given the paper is intended for eventual publication in an academic journal, and thus 45 pages and 8,000 words long, I won’t summarise the full argument. But the paper covers the following:</p>
<ul>
<li>The assumptions behind the demand to see;</li>
<li>How IDF media controls did not so much blind the world as structure a particular visuality of the conflict;</li>
<li>What we did see via the photojournalism of two British papers (with the photographs discussed printed in the paper);</li>
<li>Whether what we did see was what we should have seen (i.e., the strategy of catastrophization in Gaza I have posted on previously <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/27/gaza-from-the-beginning/" target="_blank">here</a>, <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/08/gaza-terror-mercy-law/" target="_blank">here</a> and <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/25/gaza-israels-mythical-withdrawal/" target="_blank">here</a>);</li>
<li>The implications of this for our understanding of the photography of catastrophe.</li>
</ul>
<p>The <a href=" http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/documents/Constructed_Visibility.pdf " target="_blank">draft paper is available here</a>. This is the first time I have put such an early version of work out into the public realm. The arguments are not finalised and would benefit from constructive engagement, so I welcome responses as I develop the analysis. Please read and comment.</p>
<p>Photo credit: Abid Katib/Getty</p>
<p><em><strong>Updates in the Comments below</strong></em></p>
<p><em><strong><br />
</strong></em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/05/photographing-the-catastrophe-of-gaza/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>4</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Tiananmen&#8217;s other images</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/02/tiananmen-other-images/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/02/tiananmen-other-images/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 02 Jun 2009 14:31:27 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Tiananmen]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=644</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[For most of us &#8216;Tiananmen&#8217; conjures up the image of the lone citizen standing in front of the tank. This iconic picture as been the sign around which memory of the massacre twenty years ago coalesces. 
However, in today&#8217;s Guardian novelist Ma Jian writes in honour of the thousands who were killed. It is a moving [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>For most of us &#8216;Tiananmen&#8217; conjures up the image of the lone citizen standing in front of the tank. This iconic picture as been the sign around which memory of the massacre twenty years ago coalesces. <em></em></p>
<p>However, in today&#8217;s <em>Guardian</em> novelist Ma Jian <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/jun/02/tiananmen-square-protests-1989-china" target="_blank">writes</a> in honour of the thousands who were killed. It is a moving account, notable for the stories told by the former solider, now artist, Chen Guang, and the survivor who saw his friends crushed by a tank.</p>
<p>It is also notable for the photographs (three below) that accompany the narrative &#8212; especially the graphic image of the dead on the cover of G2, the wide-angle shot of the square with serried rows of tanks, and the injured protester making his way past groups of soldiers. These are not pictures we see regularly, and in their rarity they function as a powerful testament to the violence that ended those momentous protests.</p>
<p><em>See also The Guardian&#8217;s <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/gallery/2009/jun/01/tiananmen-square-anniversary?picture=348210054" target="_blank">gallery for the 20th anniversary of Tiananmen</a>. </em></p>
<p>(<em><strong>Update 3 June</strong> — The New York Times Lens blog features a great story, <a href="http://lens.blogs.nytimes.com/2009/06/03/behind-the-scenes-tank-man-of-tiananmen/" target="_blank">Behind the Scenes: Tank Man of Tiananmen</a>, looking at the various versions of the ‘tank man’ photo.). </em></p>
<p><em>(<strong>Update 4 June</strong> &#8212; NYT Lens blog publishes for first time Terril Jones photo of &#8216;tank man&#8217; from street level, in <a href="http://lens.blogs.nytimes.com/2009/06/04/behind-the-scenes-a-new-angle-on-history/" target="_blank">Behind the Scenes: A New Angle on History</a>).</em></p>
<p><em><strong>More updates in the Comments below</strong></em></p>
<p><em><br />
</em></p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/06/g2_cover_web.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-646" title="g2_cover_web" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/06/g2_cover_web.jpg" alt="g2 cover web Tiananmens other images" width="541" height="746" /></a></p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/06/g2_pp6-7_web.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-647" title="g2_pp6-7_web" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/06/g2_pp6-7_web.jpg" alt="g2 pp6 7 web Tiananmens other images" width="538" height="294" /></a></p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/06/g2_pp10-11_web.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-648" title="g2_pp10-11_web" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/06/g2_pp10-11_web.jpg" alt="g2 pp10 11 web Tiananmens other images" width="539" height="390" /></a></p>
<p>Photo credits: AP; Jacques Langevin/Corbis/Sygma</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/06/02/tiananmen-other-images/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>3</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Embedded in Afghanistan</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/22/embedded-in-afghanistan/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/22/embedded-in-afghanistan/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 22 May 2009 05:32:35 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Afghanistan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Tim Hetherington]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=620</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Embedding photojournalists with combat units was one of the military’s greatest victories in the Iraq war. Narrowing their focus in time and space to the unit they were with produced images putting brave soldiers front and center, with both context and victims out of range. Now, with the Obama administration’s “Af-Pak” strategy being questioned, we [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Embedding photojournalists with combat units was one of the military’s greatest victories in the Iraq war. Narrowing their focus in time and space to the unit they were with produced images putting brave soldiers front and center, with both context and victims out of range. Now, with the Obama administration’s “Af-Pak” strategy being questioned, we are being offered similar visual cues from Afghanistan.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/05/wsjcom-tues-12-may-us-soldiers-in-korengal-valley.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-621" title="wsjcom-tues-12-may-us-soldiers-in-korengal-valley" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/05/wsjcom-tues-12-may-us-soldiers-in-korengal-valley.jpg" alt="wsjcom tues 12 may us soldiers in korengal valley Embedded in Afghanistan"  /></a></p>
<p>Three soldiers peering into a remote valley, rifles at the ready, the enemy seemingly elusive. High tech weaponry is readied against the elements. This is a war machine looking for a reason, certain a threat is out there, but unsure of its form. There’s even a moment of pathos, with the man on the left in his pink boxers and exposed legs lining up with his comrades. Then there is the second photo, shot from behind in the same place, but showing a strongman taking time out for a gym session. One shows a vulnerable body, the other a muscular physique, but in each case the American soldier is the subject of the photograph.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/05/korengal-valley-2-wsj-13-may.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-623" title="korengal-valley-2-wsj-13-may" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/05/korengal-valley-2-wsj-13-may.jpg" alt="korengal valley 2 wsj 13 may Embedded in Afghanistan"  /></a></p>
<p>What unites these pictures is their location – the Korengal Valley in northeastern Afghanistan. The embedding process is taking photographers and reporters to this location above all others, and photographers have been prominent in the coverage of US operations there. <a href="http://www.balazsgardi.com/ " target="_blank">Balazs Gardi</a> and <a href="http://www.vanityfair.com/politics/features/2008/01/afghanistan_slideshow200801 " target="_blank">Tim Hetherington</a> travelled there in 2007, <a href="http://www.boston.com/bigpicture/2008/11/afghanistans_korengal_valley.html " target="_blank">John Moore</a> spent time there in November 2008, producing both stills and a <a href="http://mm.gettyimages.com/mm/nicePath/GYI_Multimedia?object=a119463305 " target="_blank">multimedia piece</a>, and <a href="http://www.thenational.ae/article/20090425/MULTIMEDIA/904239992/1317 " target="_blank">Adam Dean</a> and <a href="http://www.nytimes.com/interactive/2009/04/19/world/20090420-aliabad-ambush/index.html" target="_blank">Tyler Hicks</a> have filed stories from an April 2009 embed. (See background to the Hicks’ story <a href="http://lens.blogs.nytimes.com/2009/05/20/on-assignment-with-tyler-hicks-in-afghanistan/" target="_blank">here</a>).</p>
<p>Although the visual skills of these practitioners are not in doubt, the stories they have produced are remarkably similar in both content and approach. US forces are the locus of the narrative and combat scenes are repeatedly pictured. The local community is largely unseen, except for when they encounter the Americans, and never heard. They are rendered as part of an inhospitable environment in which civilians are hard to distinguish from ‘the enemy’.</p>
<p>The effect of concentrating on one location and one side has been to badly limit our understanding of the strategic dilemma that is Afghanistan. The photographers might want to do otherwise but the embedding process is designed to produce this constraint. Its success can be judged by the way these stories effectively structure the visibility of the war in a way that foregrounds competing American military interests.</p>
<p>How we judge the photographers’ responsibility here is difficult. Logistically, being embedded is the only feasible way to cover some frontline locations. Without it we might not see anything. But the consequence of embedding is the production of a visual landscape that too easily fits with the idea that more troops or heavier fighting could lead to victory.  This political effect was part of Adam Broomberg and Oliver Chanarin’s <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/377/216/ " target="_blank">critique</a> of Tim Hetherington’s 2007 World Press Photo-winning image of an American soldier in the Korengal. (Hetherington <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/451/216/ " target="_blank">responded with a statement</a> about photojournalism’s continuing political significance, which I have considered <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/397/216/ " target="_blank">here</a>).</p>
<p>Picturing the Af-Pak war comprehensively and in context is a major photographic challenge. It cannot be easily disentangled from the politics. We are stuck with the consequences of the Bush-Blair military intervention, but there is no simple military solution in Afghanistan that will guarantee security. Yet, as much as it might be wished, withdrawing international forces from Afghanistan is unlikely to be helpful in the short-term.</p>
<p>In this context, photography has its work cut out. It has been the <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/war-in-multimedia/" target="_blank">multimedia stories</a> that are most effective at addressing the broader issues (see John D McHugh’s series <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/sixmonthsinafghanistan " target="_blank">Six Months in Afghanistan</a>, especially the film “Combat Post”), and more work of this kind is urgently needed if the human and political dimensions of the struggle for security in Afghanistan and Pakistan are going to be better understood.</p>
<p>Photo credit: David Guttenfelder/Associated Press, from <a href="http://blogs.wsj.com/photojournal/" target="_blank">WSJ.com Photo Journal</a>, 12-13 May 2009.</p>
<p><em>This is a cross-posting with <a href="http://www.nocaptionneeded.com/?p=2915" target="_blank">No Caption Needed</a>. It develops thoughts from <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/afghanistan-photojournalism/" target="_blank">an earlier post on Afghanistan</a>. Updates after posting are in the comments below.<br />
</em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/22/embedded-in-afghanistan/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>6</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Google vs. University strategies</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/21/google-vs-uni-strategies/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/21/google-vs-uni-strategies/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 21 May 2009 18:07:05 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[education]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Google]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[university]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=614</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Universities increasingly like to think of themselves as businesses, demanding flexible and entrepreneurial approaches from their staff. This is usually a fancy way of saying &#8216;do more with less&#8217;, and it’s said in numerous meetings, working groups and review panels that produce endless audits, reviews and strategy plans. Often it seems like we plan more [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Universities increasingly like to think of themselves as businesses, demanding flexible and entrepreneurial approaches from their staff. This is usually a fancy way of saying &#8216;do more with less&#8217;, and it’s said in numerous meetings, working groups and review panels that produce endless audits, reviews and strategy plans. Often it seems like we plan more than we do. Indeed, if you have ever wondered where the spirit of eastern bloc planners &#8212; with their penchant for five year strategies &#8212; migrated to, you could do worse than look in the UK higher education sector, where we are subject to an unholy bureaucratic alliance that marries centralized planning with a neo-liberal discourse.</p>
<p>I’ve often wondered, though, what real, successful businesses would think of this sort of ‘strategic’ approach? One answer comes in Eric Schmidt’s commencement address to the graduates of Carnegie Mellon University. Schmidt, of course, is CEO of Google, and love or loathe that company, you can’t deny it is both culturally significant and economically successful.  Here’s one thing Schmidt said to the graduates:</p>
<p>“Don’t bother to have a plan at all. All that stuff about having a plan, throw that out. It seems to be it’s all about opportunity and making your own luck…. You cannot plan innovation. You cannot plan invention. All you can do is try very hard to be at the right place and be ready….”</p>
<p>Perhaps that’s a bit extreme as a business model, but it’s an interesting corrective. I wouldn’t endorse all that Schmidt says, but if our managers want to be ‘business-like’, I’d at least like them to engage with the likes of Eric Schmidt.</p>
<p><object width="480" height="385" data="http://www.youtube.com/v/xiYwUde3wNo&amp;hl=en&amp;fs=1&amp;rel=0" type="application/x-shockwave-flash"><param name="allowFullScreen" value="true" /><param name="allowscriptaccess" value="always" /><param name="src" value="http://www.youtube.com/v/xiYwUde3wNo&amp;hl=en&amp;fs=1&amp;rel=0" /><param name="allowfullscreen" value="true" /></object></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/21/google-vs-uni-strategies/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>The Twitter test</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/13/the-twitter-test/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/13/the-twitter-test/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 13 May 2009 10:20:03 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[multimedia]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Twitter]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=606</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[There’s a buzz about Twitter and I’ve decided to try it out (@davidc7) to see what’s behind this excitement.
Twitter styles itself as a social networking tool that circulates to your followers answers to the question “What are you doing?” I’m not much interested in either sending or receiving that sort of stuff, but if you [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>There’s a buzz about Twitter and I’ve decided to try it out (@davidc7) to see what’s behind this excitement.</p>
<p>Twitter styles itself as a social networking tool that circulates to your followers answers to the question “What are you doing?” I’m not much interested in either sending or receiving that sort of stuff, but if you edit that question to ask “What are you thinking?” or reading, or bothered about, or excited by…then you have a potentially interesting resource.</p>
<p>This, of course, is what Jay Rosen (@jayrosen_nyu), a journalism professor at New York University, has done, calling the approach “<a href="http://latimesblogs.latimes.com/technology/2009/03/on-twitter-mind.html" target="_blank">mindcasting</a>.” For Rosen, the Twitter feeds that he follows hooks him up with a network of web tipsters, such that his own Twitter feed becomes an editorial product about the topics that concern him most. In a week of following Rosen and others on Twitter I can see his point. Indeed, the links in this post have come through the tweets I’ve been getting.</p>
<p>Interestingly, because “Twitter-ers” are also <a href="http://pewresearch.org/pubs/1117/twitter-tweet-users-demographics" target="_blank">extensive blog users and social media consumers</a>, the short, snappy format of Twitter potentially changes the nature of the blog a feed is associated with. For the likes of Rosen and <a href="http://lawdork.wordpress.com/2009/05/10/entering-the-fourth-month-law-dork-2-0/" target="_blank">Chris Geidner</a>, using Twitter as an information resource leads to “slow blogging” – more occasional but deeper and more analytical posts.</p>
<p>This strikes me as crucial, because as we get more and more embedded in the velocity of Web 2.0’s hypermedia, we still need – and perhaps need more than ever – the time and space to think about the big issues and major trends. And beyond the considered post, there is a need for even slower forms of communication like the research report, the documentary story and even (god forbid!) the academic monograph. These “old media” (a problematic concept, but more on that later) are essential because “new media” (an equally problematic concept) depend upon them for the material they re-mediate and circulate.</p>
<p>We’ll see how this goes. Along with trying to keep up with RSS feeds, a stream of tweets may produce information overload. Many people try Twitter and its growth has been impressive, but apparently <a href="http://mashable.com/2009/04/28/twitter-quitters/" target="_blank">60% of people who sign up for Twitter don’t last a month</a>. Maybe that’s because simply knowing what others are doing is in the end not very illuminating. Knowing what others are reading and thinking might be where it is at.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/05/13/the-twitter-test/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographic retouching exposed</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/29/photographic-retouching-exposed/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/29/photographic-retouching-exposed/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 29 Apr 2009 10:29:52 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Photoshop]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=603</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The issues surrounding photographic meaning, manipulation and Photoshop have been prominent recently (see my previous posts here and here, with some updates amongst the comments for each).
Via Fred Ritchin&#8217;s After Photography (see his 24 April post) comes news of a Swedish government project Girlpower dealing with sexism in advertising.
One element is a magazine cover where, [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The issues surrounding photographic meaning, manipulation and Photoshop have been prominent recently (see my previous posts <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/23/photographic-truth-and-manipulation/" target="_blank">here</a> and <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/17/photographic-truth-and-photoshop/" target="_blank">here</a>, with some updates amongst the comments for each).</p>
<p>Via Fred Ritchin&#8217;s <a href="http://www.afterphotography.org/" target="_blank">After Photography</a> (see his 24 April post) comes news of a Swedish government project <a href="http://demo.fb.se/e/girlpower/section0/index.html" target="_blank">Girlpower</a> dealing with sexism in advertising.</p>
<p>One element is a magazine cover where, step-by-step, you can <a href="http://demo.fb.se/e/girlpower/section1/index.html" target="_blank">un-do the manipulation of the model</a> to see how the glamorous cover was produced. You can go through each of the twelve changes that have been made, and at the end click on a red button to see the complete before and after images.</p>
<p>We know it happens, but in this case, seeing is really believing.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/29/photographic-retouching-exposed/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Gaza: Israel&#8217;s mythical withdrawal</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/25/gaza-israels-mythical-withdrawal/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/25/gaza-israels-mythical-withdrawal/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sat, 25 Apr 2009 09:33:46 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gaza]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Israel]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=581</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The Israel Defense Forces have completed five investigations into claims of war crimes during the war on Gaza and concluded, unsurprisingly, that those claims are unfounded.
As an IDF spokesperson said: “The bottom line is that the IDF conducted itself in an appropriate manner within the limits of international law.&#8221;
Given the points raised in my earlier [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The <a href="http://dover.idf.il/IDF/English/News/today/09/4/2201.htm" target="_blank">Israel Defense Forces have completed five investigations into claims of war crimes</a> during the war on Gaza and concluded, unsurprisingly, that those claims are unfounded.</p>
<p>As an IDF spokesperson said: “The bottom line is that the IDF conducted itself in an appropriate manner within the limits of international law.&#8221;</p>
<p>Given the points raised in <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/08/gaza-terror-mercy-law/" target="_blank">my earlier post</a>, that may be right, though it demonstrates more about international law than the nature of the violence.</p>
<p>One striking feature of the IDF presentation of its findings is a video containing a 3D animation of the urban landscape in Gaza designed to reinforce the idea that any alleged crimes were the product of the battlefield&#8217;s complex geography rather than IDF desire. In a simulation that resembles commercial war-games, the IDF video claims to detail the war-fighting strategies of Hamas forces that endangered civilians and their infrastructure.</p>
<p>The video opens with a narration designed to set the scene for the war in December 2008 that contains this claim:</p>
<p><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/04/picture-1.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-583" title="picture-1" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/04/picture-1.png" alt="picture 1 Gaza: Israels mythical withdrawal"  /></a></p>
<p>Few statements could be more untrue. As I noted in my <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/27/gaza-from-the-beginning/">first post on Gaza</a>, quoting Adi Ophir, Israel has maintained a stranglehold on the territory for the last decade or more. While the settlers and associated soliders were withdrawn, nothing for the civilian population moves in or out of Gaza without Israeli consent. What moves, when, and how much, is tightly controlled. The destiny of Gaza&#8217;s local population is therefore very much in the combined hands of Israel&#8217;s government, the elected Hamas administration and the Palestinian Authority. Until Israel accepts its part in creating the conditions of insecurity it faces, long-term solutions are going to elude all parties to the on-going conflict.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/25/gaza-israels-mythical-withdrawal/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>3</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Aid images, and the solution offered by local photographers</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/23/aid-images-and-local-photographers/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/23/aid-images-and-local-photographers/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Thu, 23 Apr 2009 15:31:15 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Africa]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[charity images]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[local photographers]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Medecins Sans Frontieres]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=574</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Some visual strategies are remarkably persistent, and few more persistent than those employed by humanitarian aid organizations when illustrating their appeals and campaign literature. We documented this in relation to food shortages in Africa as part of the Imaging Famine project.
You know the pictures without even seeing them – the photographs of mothers and their [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Some visual strategies are remarkably persistent, and few more persistent than those employed by humanitarian aid organizations when illustrating their appeals and campaign literature. We documented this in relation to food shortages in Africa as part of the <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/photography/imaging-famine/" target="_blank"><em>Imaging Famine</em> project</a>.</p>
<p>You know the pictures without even seeing them – the photographs of mothers and their distressed children, or western aid workers ministering to victims who are passive, pathetic, poor and sick. Over on the <a href="http://duckrabbit.info/blog/2009/04/msf-photoblog/" target="_blank">duckrabbit blog</a> – a regularly insightful source of photographic critique – there is an interesting breakdown of the Medecins Sans Frontieres photoblog that shows how these representations are alive and well even for one of the best activist organizations.</p>
<p>As they note, the photographs used by MSF show aid workers who are white and western even though the bulk of humanitarian assistance, even when provided in the name of European organizations, is delivered by local people. The images also suggest that dependency rather than empowerment is the best modus operandi.</p>
<p>Recently I have been trying to think about photography in ways that shifts our focus from representation to enactment, from the meaning of pictures to the work they do (see ‘<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/20/war-images-at-work/" target="_blank">War images at work</a>’). From this perspective, even the most common visual representations can have important and unusual effects in certain circumstances.</p>
<p>This is not entirely the case with the MSF photoblog, and the problems raised by duckrabbit are significant. However, that MSF pursues these visual strategies is not all that surprising. Their purpose is to put MSF at the centre of aid work, show they are making something of a difference, and get viewers to open their pockets to fund that work. Whether we like it or not – and its part of what the social psychologists call “the identifiable victim effect” – when people like us are pictured aiding individuals who are helpless, those pockets open more frequently.</p>
<p>This is not to overlook the problems of the MSF photoblog as an example of the limitations of humanitarian photography. But it is not meant to offer a full pictorial account of aid, development and Africa. As such, I would put the problem this way: it less about <em>the presence of these stereotypes</em> and more about <em>the absence of alternative visual stories</em> in news from Africa, in particular. When it comes to the photographic production of ‘Africa’, it is largely disaster and humanitarian photography that we see. Sure, we get the exotic nature stories and the romantic travel accounts, but you won’t see many complexities of African culture, politics and society in those glossy narratives either.</p>
<p>The absence of these alternative stories is often put down to the alleged lack of local and indigenous photographers, and the duckrabbit post makes this point. But I am a bit sceptical about this as the source of the problem. Can we say categorically that local people would be better storytellers? To me that assumption has as many problems as the reliance on the international photographic elite it seeks to replace. Are “local people” a single, homogenous entity with only one voice? Surely they are as diverse, plural and conflicted as our own societies, so which local voices are going to get to tell their stories, and which local voices are we going to pay attention to?</p>
<p>At about this point I’m going to be misunderstood as seemingly wanting to retain the status quo. Not so. The issue of greater attention to and work for indigenous photographers is an important issue of labour justice and political economy. There are many talented non-European photographers in this world whose work deserves greater play, and initiatives like majorityworld.com are important in redressing the economic imbalances. And nobody could object to more assistance and training for locals to tell their own stories.</p>
<p>But the idea that their work, simply because they are non-European, offers a fundamentally different and automatically better visual account of the issues and places they cover is as sweeping a generalization as that offered by the stereotypical images that dominate our media. It may be true in some instances, but, for example, having viewed the work of many talented Asian photographers at this years Chobi Mela festival in Bangladesh, I was struck by how familiar were both their subjects and their aesthetic style.</p>
<p>It is also getting to hard to clear divide from “the local” from “the international”. The Palestinian photojournalists who produced impressive pictures to cover the war in January were in many cases already employed by the big news agencies like AP and Reuters – that’s how they could get their work out so quickly. Are they local, or are they part of the global image economy? They are obviously local to the war zone, but in their professional practice they have to conform to the codes of their global media employer, and these norms condition the pictures that are taken and published.</p>
<p>We must get to see more work from local photographers in Africa, Asia and elsewhere. But we also need better work from European photographers covering those areas. If both local and international photojournalists take the time to engage with the issues rather than just parachute in and out we will all be better off. In the end, though, we should judge them, not on their birthplace or nationality, but on their ability to employ visual strategies in the service of a complex and compelling story.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/23/aid-images-and-local-photographers/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographic truth and Photoshop</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/17/photographic-truth-and-photoshop/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/17/photographic-truth-and-photoshop/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 17 Apr 2009 10:30:13 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Klavs Bo Christensen]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Photoshop]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=543</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Photography’s anxiety about truth, manipulation and reality has been on show recently. In different ways and from different contexts, people have been asking: “how much Photoshop is too much”?
From the realm of fashion, French Elle is being celebrated for running a cover story in which the models photographs have not been ‘Photoshopped’ (thereby confirming, as [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Photography’s anxiety about truth, manipulation and reality has been on show recently. In different ways and from different contexts, people have been asking: “how much Photoshop is too much”?</p>
<p>From the realm of fashion, French <em>Elle</em> is being celebrated for running <a href="http://www.pixelpress.org/afterphotography/?p=370" target="_blank">a cover story in which the models photographs have not been ‘Photoshopped’ </a>(thereby confirming, <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/23/photographic-truth-and-manipulation/" target="_blank">as I’ve noted previously</a>, that digital manipulation is the norm in this visual domain).</p>
<p>From the world of photojournalism, blogs like <a href="http://www.1854.eu/2009/04/too_much_photoshop.html" target="_blank">1854</a>, <a href="http://www.pdnpulse.com/2009/04/photo-contest-wades-into-murky-waters-of-digital-mainpulation.html" target="_blank">PDNPulse</a> and the <a href="http://theonlinephotographer.typepad.com/the_online_photographer/2009/04/danish-photojournalist-accused-of-excessive-photoshopping.html" target="_blank">Online Photographer</a> (with a follow-up <a href="http://theonlinephotographer.typepad.com/the_online_photographer/2009/04/dinosaurplanet-pictures.html" target="_blank">here</a>) have been buzzing with <a href="http://www.pressefotografforbundet.dk/index.php?id=11708 " target="_blank">the story of the Danish photographer Klavs Bo Christensen</a> who was excluded from that country’s Picture of the Year competition for excessive colour manipulation of his Haiti story.  Along with two others, Christensen was asked to submit his RAW files to the competition judges who felt that the colour in his photographs had been excessively saturated (their debate can be heard <a href="http://www.fotoco.dk/POY_2009/index.html" target="_blank">here</a>), and removed his images from the competition as a result. Christensen was subsequently happy to have his files put on the web for comparison and discussion, thereby performing an important service to the photographic community.</p>
<p>My interest in the case is less in the rights and wrongs of Christensen’s images and more in <em>how we talk about the rights and wrongs</em> of these images. For those who feel the judges were right and Christenson was wrong, the case is relatively simply. Both the judges and the bloggers are in broad agreement. Photography is understood in terms of either art or documentary/photojournalism/reportage, with the latter supposed to be free of manipulation that gets in the way of seeing the world as it really is. You can make changes to digital images that replicate what would have once been with film and paper in the darkroom, but no more. It all seems straightforward with nice clear lines that should not be crossed.</p>
<p>If only. Framing the debate in these terms relies on a conventional understanding of the history of photography that cannot be sustained. The line between ‘art’ and ‘documentary’ has been blurred ever since John Grierson, who coined the term documentary in the 1920s, argued that its purpose was to generate a particular “pattern of thought and feeling” in the viewer. This sense, replicated in all the statements by well-known photojournalists that their function is to bear witness and record the otherwise ignored injustices of modern life, means there is always a particular perspective at the heart of documentary and reportage no matter how often people want to defend it in terms of simple realism.</p>
<p>There are also some more mundane reasons why the lines of judgment are not so clear-cut. As much as those who take issue with Christensen think that the RAW files are “pretty eloquent all by themselves,” are these files really like film negatives? Can anyone actually see a RAW digital file without any post-processing? (Could we actually see a negative without post-processing?).</p>
<p>All this suggests we are talking about the <em>degree</em> of alteration and post-processing that is deemed acceptable rather than either the absence or presence of manipulation. This is confirmed by reading some of the comments in favour of the judges. <a href="http://theonlinephotographer.typepad.com/the_online_photographer/2009/04/danish-photojournalist-accused-of-excessive-photoshopping.html" target="_blank">Mike Johnston</a> summarized the view rather well:</p>
<blockquote><p>And of course there&#8217;s nothing wrong with Photoshop (or any other image editor), or with darkroom manipulation. But in photojournalism those tools are expected to be used to increase the accuracy and veracity of the photograph to the scene—not decrease it. That seems to be Mr. Christensen&#8217;s failure here, not the tools he used. He&#8217;s simply made himself a suspect witness by overdoing his manipulations to the point of obvious unreality, subverting realism for cheap effects instead of reporting it with an appropriate modicum of dispassion.</p></blockquote>
<p>This argument repeats the familiar terms justifying conventional photojournalism – veracity, witness, realism, dispassion. However, given these terms, allowing for some legitimate manipulation, the idea that one can <em>increase</em> accuracy and veracity – as opposed to simply record it without interference – undercuts the logic of the starting point.</p>
<p>Similarly, the Danish competition judges accept editing in Photoshop, thought some of Christensen’s images were satisfactory, but deemed most of them “too extreme.” So the issue is not whether you can manipulate or not, but how far one can go. The rules of the competition seek to make these limits clear:</p>
<blockquote><p>Photos submitted to Picture of The Year must be a truthful representation of whatever happened in front of the camera during exposure. You may post-process the images electronically in accordance with good practice. That is cropping, burning, dodging, converting to black and white as well as normal exposure and color correction, which preserves the image&#8217;s original expression. The Judges and exhibition committee reserve the right to see the original raw image files, raw tape, negatives and/or slides. In cases of doubt, the photographer can be pulled out of competition.</p></blockquote>
<p>So, although you have to have “a truthful representation of whatever happened in front of the camera during exposure,” even if you exposed the multi-coloured world in colour you can convert it to black and white. While Christensen was criticized for <em>over-saturating</em> his colours, he would have been in the clear had he simply, and completely, <em>de-saturated</em> them. The excessive addition of colour is a problem, but the total subtraction of colour is permitted. Is that clear?</p>
<p>Again, my interest is not in the rights and wrongs of the case, but, rather, the terms of the debate about what is right and wrong. We most definitely need photographs (including black and white pictures) we can use as documents, but we cannot justify documentary status through conventional understandings based on a mythical understanding of photography&#8217;s history and a supposedly secure analogue past. Photojournalism, as <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/397/216/" target="_blank">I’ve written elsewhere</a>, as to learn to live with tensions and contradictions as it searches for a better foundation in our digital world.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/17/photographic-truth-and-photoshop/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>12</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Gaza: terror without mercy, in the shadow of the law</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/08/gaza-terror-mercy-law/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/08/gaza-terror-mercy-law/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Wed, 08 Apr 2009 10:17:21 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gaza]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Israel]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[politics]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=518</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[“The underlying meaning of the attack on the Gaza Strip, or at least its final consequence, appears to be one of creating terror without mercy to anyone.” That is the conclusion of an independent study jointly commissioned by Physicians for Human Rights-Israel and the Palestinian Medical Relief Society.
It chimes with The Guardian’s investigation into possible [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>“The underlying meaning of the attack on the Gaza Strip, or at least its final consequence, appears to be one of creating terror without mercy to anyone.” That is the conclusion of an <a href="http://www.phr.org.il/phr/article.asp?articleid=708&amp;catid=54&amp;pcat=-1&amp;lang=ENG" target="_blank">independent study</a> jointly commissioned by Physicians for Human Rights-Israel and the Palestinian Medical Relief Society.</p>
<p>It chimes with <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/series/gaza-war-crimes-investigation" target="_blank"><em>The Guardian’s</em> investigation into possible war crimes committed</a> by Israeli forces (this being a good example of investigative, multimedia journalism), as well the testimony of Israeli soldiers gathered by the veteran&#8217;s organization <a href="http://www.shovrimshtika.org/index_e.asp" target="_blank"><em>Breaking the Silence</em></a>. Medical personnel, hospitals and civilians were all targeted, despite the Israeli Defence Force’s surveillance technology giving them the capacity to see individuals and targets clearly from some distance. Not only was the death toll high, but the destruction wreaked on Palestinian infrastructure – some 15% of all buildings in the Gaza Strip were destroyed, and half of all hospitals attacked – made this a clear case of <a href="http://muse.jhu.edu/journals/theory_and_event/v010/10.2campbell.html" target="_blank">urbicide</a>, meaning the destruction was a goal of the offensive rather than a by-product of the fighting.</p>
<p>Israeli authorities have defended their actions claiming that their forces act within the rules of war. And they may be right about that. International humanitarian law does not prevent war; it tells combatants how to conduct war. In the attack on Gaza the IDF employed international legal experts in great numbers to work out how to prosecute the offensive by establishing when, where and how they were “entitled” to attack civilians and their infrastructure. This means the assault on Gaza was a case of <a href="http://www.opendemocracy.net/article/legislative-attack" target="_blank">“lawfare.”</a></p>
<p>Hamas, through its indiscriminate rocket attacks on civilians, is also guilty of acting illegally, and deserves prosecution along with those Israeli forces that targeted medics, civilians and urban infrastructure. But there are limits to what a discourse of legality can achieve in this context. As <a href="http://www.opendemocracy.net/article/legislative-attack" target="_blank">Eyal Weizman</a> has concluded, “rather than moderation or restraint, the violence and destruction of Gaza might be the true face of international law.”</p>
<p>As such opposing the continuing occupation of Palestinian lands and the perpetual blockade of Palestinian society – note the <a href="http://www.haaretz.com/hasen/spages/1077136.html" target="_blank">on-going control of PA funds by the Israeli government</a> as evidence of the continuing strangulation that makes a mockery of the idea Israel has “withdrawn” from Gaza – might be better opposed in terms of colonial power rather than legal rights.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/08/gaza-terror-mercy-law/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>3</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>War in multimedia</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/war-in-multimedia/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/war-in-multimedia/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 07 Apr 2009 13:52:49 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[multimedia]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Afghanistan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[John D. McHugh]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=514</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[As I wrote in today&#8217;s photographic post on Afghanistan, John D. McHugh&#8217;s multimedia series Six Months in Afghanistan offers some of the best visual insights into the military realities of that conflict.
McHugh, in a session chaired by Roger Tooth of The Guardian at London&#8217;s Fontline Club last week, also provides a series of good insights [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>As I wrote in <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/afghanistan-photojournalism/" target="_blank">today&#8217;s photographic post on Afghanistan</a>, John D. McHugh&#8217;s multimedia series <em>Six Months in Afghanistan</em> offers some of the best visual insights into the military realities of that conflict.</p>
<p>McHugh, in a session chaired by Roger Tooth of <em>The Guardian</em> at London&#8217;s Fontline Club last week, also provides a series of good insights into both the benefits and problems of producing his multimedia stories. You can see a 79 min video of this discussion <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/825/226/">here</a>. The discussion deals with these issues from the 30 min mark onwards, and reveals how uncertain the political economy of multimedia is for news organisations in the UK. How to manage, produce, publicise and value multimedia is still being worked out project by project. The visual revolution for journalism is still very much in its infancy here.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/war-in-multimedia/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Afghanistan: Limits of the Photographic Landscape</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/afghanistan-photojournalism/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/afghanistan-photojournalism/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 07 Apr 2009 13:26:36 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Afghanistan]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Tim Hetherington]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=496</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The visualization of the war against the Taliban has stuck closely to the conventional understanding of the conflict in Afghanistan. With few exceptions, photojournalism has focused on the military struggles of international forces as they combat an ‘elusive’ enemy.
Starting with stories like Ron Haviv’s Road to Kabul, and evident in the contributions to the Battlespace [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The visualization of the war against the Taliban has stuck closely to the conventional understanding of the conflict in Afghanistan. With few exceptions, photojournalism has focused on the military struggles of international forces as they combat an ‘elusive’ enemy.</p>
<p>Starting with stories like Ron Haviv’s <a href="http://digitaljournalist.org/issue0208/rh_intro.htm " target="_blank"><em>Road to Kabul</em></a>, and evident in the contributions to the <a href="http://www.battlespaceonline.org/about/" target="_blank">Battlespace</a> project, the close-up portrayal of daily fighting necessarily overlooks the larger political issues. The constraints of being an embedded photographer are clear from the way different practitioners (including <a href="http://www.balazsgardi.com/" target="_blank">Balazs Gardi</a>, <a href="http://www.vanityfair.com/politics/features/2008/01/afghanistan_slideshow200801 " target="_blank">Tim Hetherington</a> and <a href="http://blogs.gettyimages.com/news/2008/12/10/photographers-journal-john-moore-in-afghanistans-korengal-valley/" target="_blank">John Moore</a>) have all travelled to hotspots like the Korengal Valley to cover American troops in action. Although their visual skills are not in doubt, the effect of photographers like this concentrating on one issue and one side has been to badly limit our understanding of the strategic dilemma that is Afghanistan.</p>
<p>We cannot turn the clock back to 2001, but if we could, pursuing the political and legal strategies <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2008/12/time-is-broken_-the-return-of-the-past-in-the-response-to-september-11-theory-event-5_4_2002.pdf" target="_blank">then advocated in response to the 9/11 attacks</a> would have been better. Now, though, we are stuck with the consequences of the Bush-Blair military intervention in Afghanistan. Dealing with that requires <a href="http://www.opendemocracy.net/article/afghanistan-a-misread-war">reading the conflict more accurately</a>, so that we can understand that the Taliban were never defeated, the fixation on Iraq distorted policy, and that there is <a href="http://www.crisisgroup.org/home/index.cfm?id=6007&amp;l=1" target="_blank">no simple military solution</a> in either Afghanistan or the Pakistan border region that will offer security.</p>
<p>Photojournalism is, of course, not solely responsible for this, even if the visual landscape it offers us too easily fits with the idea that more troops or heavier fighting could lead to victory.  (This political effect was part of <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/377/216/ " target="_blank">Broomberg and Chanarin’s critique</a> of Hetherington’s World Press Photo-winning image of an American soldier in the Korengal – <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/451/216/ " target="_blank">Hetherington responded with a statement</a> about photojournalism’s continuing political significance; I considered this debate <a href="http://www.foto8.com/home/content/view/397/216/ " target="_blank">here</a>). Sometimes, though, the stories that emerge from embedded photographers do reveal the futility of the fighting – John D McHugh’s powerful multimedia series <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/sixmonthsinafghanistan " target="_blank"><em>Six Months in Afghanistan</em></a>, especially the film <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/video/2009/feb/13/us-military-afghanistan-outpost" target="_blank">“Combat Post”</a>, is visual evidence for this claim.</p>
<p><a href="http://www.nytimes.com/2009/04/04/world/asia/04swat.html " target="_blank">Recent videos of public floggings</a> by the Taliban in Pakistan (see the Channel 4 News report from 24 March below, which begins with a beating the Taliban were happy to have filmed) confirm why anyone interested in human rights wants to see fundamentalists opposed (though see the good questions raised about them <a href="http://duckrabbit.info/blog/?p=2465">here</a>).</p>
<p><object width="486" height="412" data="http://c.brightcove.com/services/viewer/federated_f8/1184614595" type="application/x-shockwave-flash"><param name="name" value="flashObj" /><param name="bgcolor" value="#FFFFFF" /><param name="flashvars" value="videoId=17399360001&amp;playerId=1184614595&amp;viewerSecureGatewayURL=https://console.brightcove.com/services/amfgateway&amp;servicesURL=http://services.brightcove.com/services&amp;cdnURL=http://admin.brightcove.com&amp;domain=embed&amp;autoStart=false&amp;" /><param name="src" value="http://c.brightcove.com/services/viewer/federated_f8/1184614595" /></object></p>
<p>Equally, the story of the 11-year old girls in the must-see <em>New York Times</em> multimedia report <a href="http://video.nytimes.com/video/2009/02/22/world/asia/1194838044017/class-dismissed-in-swat-valley.html  " target="_blank">“Class Dismissed in the Swat Valley”</a> is a visual indictment. What these demands can’t do is prescribe the best way forward to an inclusive and non-violent future. The <a href="http://uk.truveo.com/Obama%E2%80%99s-AfPak-strategy/id/108086434342807573" target="_blank">Obama administration’s “Af-Pak” strategy</a> is an overdue recognition of the region’s problems, but its planned military tactics are likely to perpetuate the problem. Confronting the <a href="http://www.atimes.com/atimes/South_Asia/KD02Df01.html" target="_blank">“neo-Taliban”</a> – the new generation of Pakistani, Afghan, al-Qaeda and Kashmiri fighters who follow a jihadist ideology – with drone attacks that only add to the civilian death toll will be counterproductive. And, yet, as much as it might be wished, withdrawing international forces from Afghanistan is unlikely to be helpful in the short-term.</p>
<p>In this context, photography has its work cut out. It has been the multimedia stories that are most effective at addressing the broader issues, and more work of this kind is urgently needed if the human and political dimensions of the struggle for security in Afghanistan and Pakistan are going to be better understood.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/04/07/afghanistan-photojournalism/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>2</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>War images at work</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/20/war-images-at-work/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/20/war-images-at-work/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 20 Mar 2009 10:34:35 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Nepal]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[war photography]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=469</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[
Photojournalism’s representation of war is often standardized, familiar, even clichéd. Regardless of the time or place it can seem like we have seen it before, regularly and repeatedly. But if we always approach the problem from the same vantage point – asking how the event is represented – we run the risk of missing vital [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><!--StartFragment--></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">Photojournalism’s representation of war is often standardized, familiar, even clichéd. Regardless of the time or place it can seem like we have seen it before, regularly and repeatedly. But if we always approach the problem from the same vantage point – asking how the event is represented – we run the risk of missing vital dimensions and important effects of the image, as this picture from Nepal demonstrates. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/03/this-passenger-was-among-36-killed-when-the-maoists-bombed-a-bus-in-madi-chitwan-photo-kumar-shrestha.png"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-473" title="this-passenger-was-among-36-killed-when-the-maoists-bombed-a-bus-in-madi-chitwan-photo-kumar-shrestha" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/03/this-passenger-was-among-36-killed-when-the-maoists-bombed-a-bus-in-madi-chitwan-photo-kumar-shrestha.png" alt="This passenger was among 36 killed when the Maoists bombed a bus in Madi, Chitwan. Photo by Kumar Shrestha" /></a></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">This picture comes from that country’s decade-long civil war which ended in November 2006. The passenger was among 36 killed when Maoists bombed a bus near Madi in June 2005. As one of the 15,000 people who died in this period, he was an unknown statistic in what was, for the rest of the world, a forgotten conflict, an event that had disappeared from the radar even before it could be remembered. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">We could read this image, which is being recirculated through a book launched at this year’s biennial <a href="http://www.chobimela.org/index.php" target="_blank">Chobi Mela festival of photography</a>, as the making visible of something we should have known about. Or it could be another testament to lives lost, marked by <a href="http://www.nocaptionneeded.com/?p=1578" target="_blank">hands of death</a>. Or we could see it as a further instance of the indirect marking of mass death, preserving dignity while recording loss. While such accounts provide understanding, they do not draw our attention to the larger significance of this image. If we shift our focus from representation to enactment, from meaning to work, we can appreciate this photograph for its vitality in the present rather than merely its record of the past. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">As one of the 179 photographs by 80 photographers selected from the more than 2,000 submitted for the exhibition “<a href="http://www.apeoplewar.com/] " target="_blank">A People War: Images of the Nepal Conflict 1996-2006</a>,” this picture toured Nepal throughout 2008. As a book and exhibition, “A People War” contains what individually might be regarded as unremarkable <a href="http://www.phalano.com/?p=604" target="_blank">images</a> in the global archive of war photography. Its catalogue of uniformed guerrillas, grieving widows, destroyed infrastructure, damaged individuals and mobilizing soldiers could, by themselves, have been drawn from any number of conflicts. Despite the editors desire to forgo showing unvarnished violence (hence the photograph of the bomb victim’s hand), there are pictures that shock, especially those that record the lynching of a teacher and journalist.  </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">If, however, we view the images collectively and ask ourselves what work they are doing through the book and the exhibition, then they become something quite remarkable. Being shown within a year of the war’s end, this collection is an act of raw experience, a detailed encounter with what the conflict’s participants and victims have suffered so recently. Nepalese responded to this act in large numbers, with more than 350,000 people queuing to see it in 30 towns across the country – as in this picture from Surkhet. With thousands of free copies of the book distributed to public and school libraries across the countries, and a Nepali language budget edition made available for widespread sale, the organizers have ensured the photographs the broadest circulation possible.</span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/03/04-surkhet-local-crowds-wait-to-enter-the-exhibition.jpg"><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-474" title="04-surkhet-local-crowds-wait-to-enter-the-exhibition" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/03/04-surkhet-local-crowds-wait-to-enter-the-exhibition.jpg" alt="Surkhet - local crowds wait to enter the exhibition" /></a></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">People did not just look at the pictures. They engaged with the photographs. Mothers looked for evidence of missing family members, soldiers faced the consequences of their actions, and children witnessed what the future could be like if politics did not triumph over violence. To this end, the exhibition is also a warning to a fragile country. It functions as a statement in defense of the new federal republic, using the photographs to speak of a time to come, declaring that even if that future is not yet capable of being pictured, Nepalese know only too well what it could look like. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">Photographs by Kumar Shrestha and Kirin Krishna Shrestha/nepa-laya. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US"><em>This is a cross-positing with <a href="http://www.nocaptionneeded.com/?p=2345" target="_blank">No Caption Needed</a>. </em></span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal">
<div class="ngg-imagebrowser" id="ngg-imagebrowser-14-469">

	<h3>A People War-cover</h3>

	<div class="pic">
<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/gallery/a-people-war/a-people-war-cover.png" title="" class="thickbox" rel="a-people-war">
	<img alt="A People War-cover" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/gallery/a-people-war/a-people-war-cover.png" title="War images at work" />
</a>
</div>
	<div class="ngg-imagebrowser-nav"> 
		<div class="back">
			<a class="ngg-browser-prev" id="ngg-prev-66" href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/20/war-images-at-work/?pid=66">&#9668; Back</a>
		</div>
		<div class="next">
			<a class="ngg-browser-next" id="ngg-next-60" href="http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/20/war-images-at-work/?pid=60">Next &#9658;</a>
		</div>
		<div class="counter">Picture 1 of 7</div>
		<div class="ngg-imagebrowser-desc"><p></p></div>
	</div>	

</div>	

</p>
<p><!--EndFragment--></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/20/war-images-at-work/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>3</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Obama @ 50 days</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/17/obama-50-days/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/17/obama-50-days/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 17 Mar 2009 09:27:25 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Obama]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=466</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[Early indications about the emerging Obama doctrine in foreign policy are positive. As Jonathan Freedland wrote in the Guardian, repudiation of the Bush legacy, some plain talking and a few imaginative diplomatic initiatives are all good. 
But last week there was a disturbing turn, in the withdrawal of Charles Freeman&#8217;s appointment to the National Intelligence Council. [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>Early indications about the emerging Obama doctrine in foreign policy are positive. As <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/commentisfree/2009/mar/11/barack-obama-doctrine-us-foreign-policy" target="_blank">Jonathan Freedland </a>wrote in the Guardian, repudiation of the Bush legacy, some plain talking and a few imaginative diplomatic initiatives are all good. </p>
<p>But last week there was a disturbing turn, in the withdrawal of Charles Freeman&#8217;s appointment to the National Intelligence Council. Freeman was forced out because &#8212; in the <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/mar/11/obama-administration-barack-obama" target="_blank">words of NY Democrat Senator Charles Schumer</a> &#8212; &#8220;his statements against Israel were way over the top.&#8221; Apparently Freeman declared that until &#8220;Israeli violence against Palestinians&#8221; is halted, &#8220;it is utterly unrealistic to expect that Palestinians will stand down from violent resistance&#8221;. Against Israel? Way over the top?</p>
<p>When it comes to Israeli policy, plain speaking is not acceptable in Washington. Whether Obama dumped Freeman or simply failed to fight on this behalf, this &#8212;  as the <a href="http://www.salon.com/opinion/greenwald/2009/03/10/freeman/index.html" target="_blank">background to this story</a> makes clear &#8212; is a bad sign for future American policy on the occupation of Palestinian territory and the strangulation of Palestinian life, not to mention the long term guarantee of Israeli security.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/03/17/obama-50-days/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Photographic truth and manipulation</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/23/photographic-truth-and-manipulation/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/23/photographic-truth-and-manipulation/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 23 Feb 2009 09:46:42 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[manipulation]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Photoshop]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=457</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[We know photographs can be false yet we want them to be true. Indeed, the desire for photographic veracity has persisted, perhaps even intensified, even as knowledge about image manipulation becomes more widespread.
Reflecting on the Oscar ceremonies, MediaGuardian has documented the widespread use of Photoshop to enhance celebrity photographs in fashion and gossip magazines. Every [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>We know photographs can be false yet we want them to be true. Indeed, the desire for photographic veracity has persisted, perhaps even intensified, even as knowledge about image manipulation becomes more widespread.</p>
<p>Reflecting on the Oscar ceremonies, <a href=" http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/feb/23/newspaper-photography " target="_blank">MediaGuardian</a> has documented the widespread use of Photoshop to enhance celebrity photographs in fashion and gossip magazines. Every cover, says one media insider, has been altered to some degree, with some of these changes exposed in the <a href="http://jezebel.com/5115667/2008-photoshop-hall-of-shame " target="_blank">“Photoshop Hall of Shame”</a> and <a href="http://photoshopdisasters.blogspot.com/ " target="_blank">“Photoshop Disasters”</a>. So common is the practice that when an October 2008 <a href="http://jezebel.com/5060704/the-sarah-palin-non+photoshop-chop-fox-news-wants-to-alter-your-reality " target="_blank">Newsweek cover of Vice Presidential candidate Sarah Palin was<em> not</em> airbrushed</a>, conservative anchors on Fox television complained that this amounted to liberal bias. (Fox knew about the political power of such changes because it had earlier <a href="http://www.huffingtonpost.com/2008/10/09/fox-news-ironically-obses_n_133337.html?page=2&amp;show_comment_id=16696440#comment_16696440 " target="_blank">manipulated the photos of two <em>New York Times</em> journalists</a> it wanted to discredit).</p>
<p>Despite being widespread, digital manipulation provokes anxiety and unease, especially when news photographs are involved. The scandals surrounding <a href="http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-srv/photo/essays/vanRiper/030409.htm " target="_blank">Brian Walski’s</a> 2003 photos from Iraq and <a href="http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/world/middle_east/5254838.stm " target="_blank">Adnan Hajj’s</a> 2006 pictures from Lebanon led to both men being fired from their jobs, and the governments of Iran and the US have been criticized when they released <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/news/blog/2008/jul/10/iranianmissiletestsnotwhat " target="_blank">altered military images of missiles</a> and <a href="http://www.editorsweblog.org/analysis/2008/11/ap_military_photo_ban_can_we_trust_what-print.html" target="_blank">a general</a>.</p>
<p>What is commonplace in one visual domain (fashion) is regarded as taboo in another (news). Yet both realms are still regulated by a desire for photographs to be accurate and authentic documents. The persistence and power of this desire despite <a href="http://www.cs.dartmouth.edu/farid/research/digitaltampering/" target="_blank">the long history of photographic manipulation</a> (chemical and digital) is something that needs explanation.</p>
<p><em>SEE SOME UPDATES IN THE COMMENTS BELOW&#8230;</em></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/23/photographic-truth-and-manipulation/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>6</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Education values</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/13/education-values/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/13/education-values/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Fri, 13 Feb 2009 08:38:51 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[education]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[university]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=450</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[
I&#8217;ve just caught up with a remarkable speech by the Australian Minister for Innovation, Industry, Science and Research, who is responsible for higher education for the country’s still new Labor government. Addressing the National Press Club last September on the topic of innovation, he spoke not of technology or economics, but of the arts, humanities [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><!--StartFragment--></p>
<p class="MsoNormal">I&#8217;ve just caught up with a remarkable <a href="http://minister.innovation.gov.au/Carr/Pages/THEARTOFINNOVATION-ADDRESSTOTHENATIONALPRESSCLUB.aspx" target="_blank">speech by the Australian Minister for Innovation, Industry, Science and Research</a>, who is responsible for higher education for the country’s still new Labor government. Addressing the National Press Club last September on the topic of innovation, he spoke not of technology or economics, but of the arts, humanities and social science. Placing them at the forefront of the search for “new ways of understanding ourselves and our world,” Senator Carr concluded:</p>
<p class="MsoNormal">“I believe the creative arts – and the humanities and the social sciences – make a terrible mistake when they claim support on the basis of their commercial value. Whatever they may be worth in the marketplace, it is their intrinsic value we should treasure them for. We should support these disciplines because they give us pleasure, knowledge, meaning, and inspiration. No other pay-off is required.”</p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">It’s impossible to imagine any of his British counterparts, or any of our university managers, being so bold. The dull hand of market economics now governs higher education to such an extent that the core values of education are regularly impoverished. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">Ever since the Labour Government in Britain introduced “top-up fees” for universities, the sector is governed by the mantra that “students now pay for their education” in the same way as if they were buying a car. Only they aren’t. As <a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/have-i-paid-for-my-degree.pdf" target="_blank">I explained in an article to first year students in 2006</a>, the fees they pay cover only a small part of the total cost of providing their experience of education. This means <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/education/2009/feb/03/university-access-social-exclusion" target="_blank">predominantly middle class students</a> remain the beneficiaries of substantial subsidies no matter how much they talk about being consumers or customers. But most importantly, they don’t pay because you can’t buy education – it’s not a commodity; it is a process, an experience, which depends on a social contract of active and mutual participation that cannot be costed out. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span lang="EN-US">Its one thing for students to mis-understand this, quite another for the education media and our managers who regularly repeat the economistic assumptions. A simple read of Senator Carr’s speech could benefit all of us, especially in these recessionary times. <span> </span></span></p>
<p><!--EndFragment--></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/13/education-values/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>1</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Sabina Park&#8230;sweet</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/09/sabina-parksweet/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/09/sabina-parksweet/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 09 Feb 2009 09:14:56 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[sport]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[cricket]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=443</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[When Sky ran this advertisement for their cricket coverage in the weekend papers&#8230;

they didn&#8217;t realise how right they were&#8230;

It was sweet&#8230;England 51 all out at Sabina Park&#8230;sweet indeed.
]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>When Sky ran this advertisement for their cricket coverage in the weekend papers&#8230;</p>

<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/gallery/cricket/sky-ad.png" title="" class="thickbox" rel="singlepic58" >
	<img class="ngg-singlepic" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/plugins/nextgen-gallery/nggshow.php?pid=58&amp;width=320&amp;height=240&amp;mode=" alt="sky-ad.png" title="sky-ad.png" />
</a>

<p>they didn&#8217;t realise how right they were&#8230;</p>

<a href="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/gallery/cricket/kp-getting-bowled.png" title="" class="thickbox" rel="singlepic59" >
	<img class="ngg-singlepic" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/plugins/nextgen-gallery/nggshow.php?pid=59&amp;width=320&amp;height=240&amp;mode=" alt="kp-getting-bowled.png" title="kp-getting-bowled.png" />
</a>

<p>It was sweet&#8230;England 51 all out at Sabina Park&#8230;sweet indeed.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/09/sabina-parksweet/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>5</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Death of photography?</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/08/death-of-photography/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/08/death-of-photography/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 08 Feb 2009 13:40:43 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[photography]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Chobi Mela]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=436</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The death of photography is something that is often proclaimed.
Of course, such an announcement is problematic because what is this thing called &#8220;photography&#8221;? It is a concept so broad, encompassing everything from the art image to the advertising campaign, from the hard-hitting news photo to the long-term documentary project, that any declaration of its demise [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The death of photography is something that is often proclaimed.</p>
<p>Of course, such an announcement is problematic because what is this thing called &#8220;photography&#8221;? It is a concept so broad, encompassing everything from the art image to the advertising campaign, from the hard-hitting news photo to the long-term documentary project, that any declaration of its demise has to be premature. </p>
<p>Announcing the death of photography is often a coded way of saying that the still picture is no longer important. Yet this declaration to seems more than little premature. In the last year, some 250 billion digital photographs were produced. This number is growing rapidly, so that by 2010 (next year) some 500 billion digital photographs will be made globally. A quick glance at the video from the Chobi Mela opening (below) shows how digital cameras are prominent across the world. </p>
<p>Even this sign of health is taken by some to indicate another likely death &#8212; that of the professional photographer at the hands of the amateur or citizen photographer. That claim, too, seems premature. A quick glance across any newsstand, or a short time spent surfing the web, will demonstrate that the place of the professional, skilled photographer &#8212; while undoubtedly under all sorts of pressure &#8212; is nonetheless still very prominent. Professional photographers have a particular responsibility. Our world is mediated visually. We &#8212; whether picture makers or image consumers &#8212; come to understand our lives in context through visual representations. That visual understanding then establishes the possibility for thinking about politics, citizenship, rights and action. </p>
<p>In the global image economy some things are included and many things are excluded. The relations of pictorial power are not equal. The great virtue of <a href="http://www.chobimela.org/index.php" target="_blank">Chobi Mela</a> over the years, and the great impact of <a href="http://www.drik.net/" target="_blank">Drik</a> since its inception, has been to make these questions of inclusion and exclusion &#8212; and how these inclusions and exclusions are politically important &#8212; unavoidable for all who take photography seriously. </p>
<p>Photography is very much alive, very important, but also undergoing great transformations. It is changing rapidly in nature, technology and purpose and we need to understand how these changes will play out politically. It is no longer possible (if it ever was) to put our faith in photography as an objective record of the world out there, so how can we use images to document the all-too-common injustices of the present global order? The mainstream media produces and supports one set of global visions, but how can photographers challenge these visual accounts that so often lack both context and complexity? Chobi Mela&#8217;s many exhibitions are one way of addressing these questions. </p>
<p>[<em>My remarks at the opening ceremony for Chobi Mela V, Dhaka, 30 January 2009</em>]</p>
<p> <object width="400" height="300" data="http://vimeo.com/moogaloop.swf?clip_id=3130905&amp;server=vimeo.com&amp;show_title=1&amp;show_byline=1&amp;show_portrait=0&amp;color=&amp;fullscreen=1" type="application/x-shockwave-flash"><param name="allowfullscreen" value="true" /><param name="allowscriptaccess" value="always" /><param name="src" value="http://vimeo.com/moogaloop.swf?clip_id=3130905&amp;server=vimeo.com&amp;show_title=1&amp;show_byline=1&amp;show_portrait=0&amp;color=&amp;fullscreen=1" /></object><br />
<a href="http://vimeo.com/3130905">Chobi Mela V opening</a> from <a href="http://vimeo.com/user1061239">David Campbell</a> on <a href="http://vimeo.com">Vimeo</a>.<br />
<span style="font-family: -webkit-monospace;"><br />
</span></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/02/08/death-of-photography/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Gaza, from the beginning</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/27/gaza-from-the-beginning/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/27/gaza-from-the-beginning/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Tue, 27 Jan 2009 16:00:07 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Gaza]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Israel]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=404</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[How one thinks about Israel’s war on Gaza depends on where one begins the story.
For conservatives like Alan Dershowitz, Hamas declared war against Israel with its rocket attacks in late 2008, meaning that Israel had the right under the UN charter (despite its long history of ignoring UN Security Council resolutions) to take whatever military [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>How one thinks about Israel’s war on Gaza depends on where one begins the story.</p>
<p>For conservatives like <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/commentisfree/2009/jan/08/hamas-dershowitz-israel-gaza " target="_blank">Alan Dershowitz</a>, Hamas declared war against Israel with its rocket attacks in late 2008, meaning that Israel had the right under the UN charter (despite its long history of ignoring UN Security Council resolutions) to take whatever military action was necessary to stop the attacks.</p>
<p>For critics like <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/jan/07/gaza-israel-palestine " target="_blank">Avi Shlaim</a>, it’s a matter of setting it all in an historical context that goes back to the establishment of Israel in 1948. One then sees in Gaza “a uniquely cruel case of de-development” the stripped the occupied territory of a reasonable future. In 2005, after Israel’s settlers were withdrawn, continued Israeli colonial control meant “Gaza was converted overnight into an open-air prison.”</p>
<p>For <a href="http://www.zcommunications.org/znet/viewArticle/20230 " target="_blank">Adi Ophir</a>, the noose around Gaza that has made it a “laboratory of catastrophization” can also be dated from that time. The post-2005 military siege, building on the closure begun during the 1991 Gulf War, strangled the flow of people, goods and resources and created a zone of permanent emergency that functions like a “human pen.”</p>
<p>Taking the broader historical view is the only way forward. Looking back even a few years paints a different picture. An <a href="http://www.huffingtonpost.com/nancy-kanwisher/reigniting-violence-how-d_b_155611.html " target="_blank">analysis of ceasefires</a> in Israel/Palestine has shown that the vast majority have been broken first by Israeli military actions. The unwritten, six-month ceasefire of 2008 was effective in almost eliminating Hamas rocket attacks. But between an Israeli attack on November 4 and the ceasefires’ conclusion on 19 December, Israel charged Palestinian groups with firing more than 300 rockets into Israel and Hamas claimed more than 70 military incursions by Israeli forces (see the <a href="http://www.crisisgroup.org/home/index.cfm?id=5838&amp;l=1" target="_blank">International Crisis Group report of 5/1/09</a> for a good analysis).</p>
<p>Imaging a more permanent end of hostilities and inequalities in Gaza and the West Bank requires a rethinking of their causes. It is not about blame; it is about inescapable responsibilities. And it requires that all parties recognize and engage each other without preconditions. Looking at only the most recent actions will not get us very far in that direction.</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/27/gaza-from-the-beginning/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>2</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Newspaper as television</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/26/newspaper-as-television/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/26/newspaper-as-television/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Mon, 26 Jan 2009 17:55:09 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[multimedia]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[journalism]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[photojournalism]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=399</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[The media landscape is changing radically. When The Guardian (rightly) wins a Broadcast News award for its July 2008 video on Zimbabwe’s rigged election – which was posted on the newspaper&#8217;s web site before being shown on BBC television – then we have proof that the barriers between print, on-line and television are being blurred [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p>The media landscape is changing radically. When <em>The Guardian</em> (rightly) wins a Broadcast News award for its <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/jan/22/guardian-films-wins-broadcast-award" target="_blank">July 2008 video on Zimbabwe’s rigged election</a> – which was posted on the newspaper&#8217;s web site before being shown on BBC television – then we have proof that the barriers between print, on-line and television are being blurred by multimedia.</p>
<p>This convergence is not without its problems. The mainstream media is using ‘clickstream’ data on what drives digital consumers to their site in a way that could see more of the same superficial journalism in more outlets. According to Andrew Currah of Oxford University;</p>
<p><a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/media/2009/jan/19/news-publishing-web-traffic " target="_blank">“A paradox of the 24/7 media environment is that &#8211; owing to the integration of newsrooms, and the duplication of stories across print, broadcast and online &#8211; the news agenda has become more homogeneous, despite there being more channels through which to access it.”</a></p>
<p>The work of <em>The Guardian</em>, and independent producers like MediaStorm, shows that creative and challenging stories can be produced and distributed. It’s up to the mainstream digital media to use the technological opportunities to do something similar.</p>
<p>[See Andrew Currah’s full report on the future of news publishing in the UK in the digital age, <em><a href="http://reutersinstitute.politics.ox.ac.uk/about/news/item/article/whats-happening-to-our-news.html " target="_blank">What’s Happenning to Our News</a></em>, Reuters Institute for the Study of Journalism, January 2009].</p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/26/newspaper-as-television/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
		<item>
		<title>Obama, week 1</title>
		<link>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/25/obama-week-1/</link>
		<comments>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/25/obama-week-1/#comments</comments>
		<pubDate>Sun, 25 Jan 2009 13:59:48 +0000</pubDate>
		<dc:creator>David Campbell</dc:creator>
				<category><![CDATA[politics]]></category>
		<category><![CDATA[Obama]]></category>

		<guid isPermaLink="false">http://www.david-campbell.org/?p=381</guid>
		<description><![CDATA[
It was all about the expectations. Would Obama be true to the progressive ethos of his campaign, or would entering office dull the prospects for change? At the end of week one – too early to offer any definitive conclusions, to be sure – things are looking unexpectedly good. 
Obama was never going to be [...]]]></description>
			<content:encoded><![CDATA[<p><!--StartFragment--></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span>It was all about the expectations. Would Obama be true to the progressive ethos of his campaign, or would entering office dull the prospects for change? At the end of week one – too early to offer any definitive conclusions, to be sure – things are looking unexpectedly good. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span>Obama was never going to be a progressive in the sense of even a centre-left, European social democrat. Being American president means embodying the narrative of exceptionalism, individualism and patriotism of that country. But when an inaugural address pays heed to the need for “the tempering qualities of humility and restraint” in American power, its possible something different is afoot. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span>And the first week quickly and decisively brought many good things with regard to America’s position in the world. The “rule of law” was installed as a motif for the new administration; liberty and security are no longer seen as a zero-sum game; the dubious military trials of terror suspects have been suspended; Guantanamo is to be closed in no more than a year; <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/world/2009/jan/23/secret-prisons-closure-obama-cia" target="_blank">CIA prisons</a> and other &#8216;black sites&#8217; (see map from <em>The Guardian</em>, below) in Bush’s war on terror are being shut; torture is ruled out; rendition is no more; and the Geneva Conventions are to be respected. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span>The new administration’s <a href="http://www.whitehouse.gov/agenda/foreign_policy/ " target="_blank">foreign policy statement</a> contains other promising moves: Iran is to be engaged without preconditions and nuclear weapons development is to be curtailed (though whether <a href="http://www.guardian.co.uk/commentisfree/2009/jan/22/barack-obama-nuclear-weapons " target="_blank">the details of this position</a> match the headlines is open to question). And his <a href="http://www.washingtonpost.com/wp-dyn/content/article/2009/01/23/AR2009012301220.html?hpid=topnews" target="_blank">support of US missile strikes inside Pakistan</a> shows that not all Bush administration strategies are going out the window. </span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span>In short, a more ethical American leadership is emerging. Yet what is striking is how this return to a liberal internationalism is so heartily welcomed as progressive. This euphoria reveals how much the destructive radicalism of the eight dark years of the Bush administration has distorted our perspective.</span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"><span><img class="alignnone size-full wp-image-382" title="black sites" src="http://www.david-campbell.org/wp-content/uploads/2009/01/us-secret-prisons.png" alt="black sites" /></span></p>
<p class="MsoNormal"> </p>
<p><!--EndFragment--></p>
]]></content:encoded>
			<wfw:commentRss>http://www.david-campbell.org/2009/01/25/obama-week-1/feed/</wfw:commentRss>
		<slash:comments>0</slash:comments>
		</item>
	</channel>
</rss>
